Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutBOILER & CHILLER REPLACEMENT/SENIOR CENTER/2007-2008BOILER &CHILLER REPLACEMENT/ SENIOR CENTER/ 2007/2008 a? - boo - 07 3 -MAe - OT 4- mA 2- o Y /E- M e- 0 8 leer � C-�, l tb- cerr�esv�b �er�:�or e r J,,7 r -1 eo 8 ��I elf = -RA sol :. vv, 0-7— 333 r ',. AWL M it - I-V eked- ara 4�v. Qr� qt -6 ctkev� rzk areme4- :. P t cans S G t, ca.� -� or►S ,Pr't��poscL�� 4 nci Co rY'4'ac--P Tror T1eG Senor C�►�c w �o'� L2r �c� C �,; l(,e� �{���a�e�en�- �,�- cv'�eL-� -. 6 $ " 53 se.-Win q cL toa i ip �'� c �►2R r ► +�.q On Q 1, o , c7m s on (Jlcths� Spe&f Mons , grn,, o� Cah n g 4L C *p .s4uC.-t- t 8, o"P S cxl ; o v' Cen -��,r � � (ems a.n r1 CI-►; (l ev� �e.�ac2r+,eK� �r�J e.e� , d � r�e.c.�: tit 0 a C, 4 C} e r 4 c--f— o-P so-; h &Q,r► h c� ► r,e L� n� C,�, L�h� new 4,o Piscv- ScL ;j lans C" - ; le . j ReSOI�t-�,Oh D %^ (09 G� roJir.C1 �(C�nS �Je.C�- I- �U� -t,DnS 4vrm ^OT C t'AGl i e_4-rv,t,Te- bT ct:,J 4 v- +4e- Cmn&4uC4l0)1 o'f' Y'h� JQJCrA� �n�Q,✓' o', �QX' CL: l 2r R�facen� "-f- PCX(;4 io,mavin+ of Set-"r&4 � oaorrfc& P -C�C.� %r ( (� (J C�-�`( C(e�.k- �t��iS�, Cl�er�rS�ewT ✓' J; JS ttnd -t-iX , rt ��"► me... � � (�c� �or �e.c e; P-f - o-� bi ci S. 3o 16- U (*-v - Ref a C) Y-i, \rN 'k V- 0 oy- C—, \A ot-/-Y--3 awarcLnq ca,4y-cr-+ and c-ut4-1,ori*4,,'h 4-r:;, S" r, arc) 41,0 C;� Qt-r Y, 4v acs+ cL Q)4 + �r 1% C41 10 vt a 44 IL stro3l ce,144 arxi C i ;Ilow -f r ,,, j ii — A,3- 0 � .20 - Srz P - 1) IE SCI ((A. cz cc-eef. 4- n q 4-ke YL', -a v- "-So; C k t r- -T?,kf L cL c- e-mce-y, � Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Engineering Division, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240; (319) 356 -5044 RESOLUTION NO. 07 -333 RESOLUTION APPROVING, AUTHORIZING AND DIRECTING THE MAYOR TO EXECUTE AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST AN AGREEMENT BY AND BETWEEN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY AND GESSNER GROUP, INC. TO PROVIDE ENGINEERING CONSULTANT SERVICES FOR THE SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT. WHEREAS, the City of Iowa City desires to replace two HVAC systems that are at the end of their life cycle and the compressor is short cycling and the boiler is inefficient and costly to operate; and WHEREAS, when both systems are replaced there will be lower maintenance and operational costs; and WHEREAS, the City desires the services of a consulting firm to prepare preliminary and final design for construction of the Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project; and WHEREAS, the City of Iowa City has negotiated an Agreement for said consulting services with Gessner Group, Inc., to provide said services; and WHEREAS, it is in the public interest to enter into said Consultant Agreement with Gessner Group, Inc. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: 1. The Consultant's Agreement attached hereto is in the public interest, and is approved as to form and content. 2. The Mayor and City Clerk are hereby authorized and directed to execute the attached Consultant's Agreement in duplicate. Passed and approved this 27th day of November , 20o7 L P--s �- � i MAYOR ATTEST:,.�.��J 9i�• 9J CITY-CLERK Pweng /res /designagl - SrCenlerBoilecdoc App ved by -h� City Attorney's Office 11' If/07 Resolution No. 07 -333 Page 2 It was moved by Champion and seconded by Vanderhoef the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: x Bailey x Champion x Correia x Elliott x O'Donnell x Vanderhoef x Wilburn CONSULTANT AGREEMENT DRAFT THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this A-7 day of , 2007 by and between the City of Iowa City, a municipal corporation, hereinafter referred to as the City and Gessner Group, Inc., of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter referred to as the Consultant. WHEREAS, the proposed project shall consist of replacement of the existing boiler, air - cooled chiller, pumps, and four main air handling units, and upgrading the building controls system as required to accommodate the new equipment at the Iowa City Senior Center, 28 South Linn Street. Three of the four existing air handling units will be upgraded from multizone and constant volume reheat systems to VAV systems. The existing equipment is almost 30 years old and is nearing the end of its serviceable lifespan. The replacement of the equipment will prevent the necessity for emergency replacement, increase the energy efficiency of the building, drastically reduce the maintenance time and costs required, provide system redundancy, and provide better occupant comfort. NOW THEREFORE, it is agreed by and between the parties hereto that the City does now contract with the Consultant to provide services as set forth herein. I. SCOPE OF SERVICES Consultant agrees to perform the following services for the City, and to do so in a timely and satisfactory manner. Gessner Group, Inc. shall provide the following services: 1. Review existing system performance with building maintenance personnel. 2. Calculate building block loads to ensure proper sizing of new equipment. 3. Design all electrical system modifications required to accommodate the new mechanical systems. 4. Provide complete plans and specifications for bidding and demolition of existing systems. 5. Provide complete plans and specifications for bidding and construction of new systems. 6. Coordinate design of all new work with existing building space and structural constraints. 7. Attend design, pre -bid and construction meetings as necessary. 8. Assist the City with review of contractor bids. 9. Review contractor shop drawings and submittals. 10. Perform construction observation at rough -in and substantial completion and provide reports to the City and contractor. 11. Include as part of the construction contract documents that the Contractor shall create and provide to the City complete as -built record drawings of all work performed in both printed and electronic form. -2- II. TIME OF COMPLETION Design drawings shall be completed 3 -4 weeks from authorization from the City to proceed. III. GENERAL TERMS A. The Consultant shall not commit any of the following employment practices and agrees to prohibit the following practices in any subcontracts. To discharge or refuse to hire any individual because of their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, disability, age, marital status, gender identity, or sexual orientation. 2. To discriminate against any individual in terms, conditions, or privileges of employment because of their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, disability, age, marital status, gender identity, or sexual orientation. B. Should the City terminate this Agreement, the Consultant shall be paid for all work and services performed up to the time of termination. However, such sums shall not be greater than the "lump sum" amount listed in Section IV. The City may terminate this Agreement upon seven (7) calendar days' written notice to the Consultant. C. This Agreement shall be binding upon the successors and assigns of the parties hereto, provided that no assignment shall be without the written consent of all Parties to said Agreement. D. It is understood and agreed that the retention of the Consultant by the City for the purpose of the Project shall be as an independent contractor and shall be exclusive, but the Consultant shall have the right to employ such assistance as may be required for the performance of the Project. E. It is agreed by the City that all records and files pertaining to information needed by the Consultant for the project shall be available by said City upon reasonable request to the Consultant. The City agrees to furnish all reasonable assistance in the use of these records and files. F. It is further agreed that no Party to this Agreement shall perform contrary to any state, federal, or local law or any of the ordinances of the City of Iowa City, Iowa. G. At the request of the City, the Consultant shall attend meetings of the City Council relative to the work set forth in this Agreement. Any requests made by the City shall be given with reasonable notice to the Consultant to assure attendance. H. The Consultant agrees to furnish, upon termination of this Agreement and upon demand by the City, copies of all basic notes and sketches, charts, computations, and any other data prepared or obtained by the Consultant pursuant to this Agreement without cost, and without restrictions or limitation as to the use relative -3- to specific projects covered under this Agreement. In such event, the Consultant shall not be liable for the City's use of such documents on other projects. The Consultant agrees to furnish all reports, specifications, and drawings, with the seal of a professional engineer affixed thereto or such seal as required by Iowa law. J. The City agrees to tender the Consultant all fees in a timely manner, excepting, however, that failure of the Consultant to satisfactorily perform in accordance with this Agreement shall constitute grounds for the City to withhold payment of the amount sufficient to properly complete the Project in accordance with this Agreement. K. Should any section of this Agreement be found invalid, it is agreed that the remaining portion shall be deemed severable from the invalid portion and continue in full force and effect. L. Original contract drawings shall become the property of the City. The Consultant shall be allowed to keep mylar reproducible copies for the Consultant's own filing use. M. Fees paid for securing approval of authorities having jurisdiction over the Project will be paid by the City. N. Upon signing this agreement, Consultant acknowledged that Section 362.5 of the Iowa Code prohibits a City officer or employee from having an interest in a contract with the City, and certifies that no employee or officer of the City, which includes members of the City Council and City boards and commissions, has an interest, either direct or indirect, in this agreement, that does not fall within the exceptions to said statutory provision enumerated in Section 362.5. O. The Consultant agrees at all times material to this Agreement to have and maintain professional liability insurance covering the Consultant's liability for the Consultant's negligent acts, errors and omissions to the City in the sum of $1,000,000. IV. COMPENSATION FOR SERVICES Gessner Group proposes to provide the above services for the following fixed fee: Mechanical and Electrical Design $61,750 All printing costs beyond one set of review drawings and one set of bid /construction drawings shall be reimbursed to the Consultant at the actual cost plus a 10% handling fee. V. MISCELLANEOUS -4- A. All provisions of the Agreement shall be reconciled in accordance with the generally accepted standards of the Engineering Profession. B. It is further agreed that there are no other considerations or monies contingent upon or resulting from the execution of this Agreement, that it is the entire Agreement, and that no other monies or considerations have been solicited. FOR THE Y By: Title: Mayor Date: November 27, 2007 ATTEST:/ Cit Clerk pw \forms \consagmMrm YFO THE C SUtTANT By: ��1 Title: 0 "l Date: Z:5- U Approved by: City Attorney's Office Date 1 CITY OF IOWA CITY � 1 ' DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING DIVISION PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA 1 1 1 1 h Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION >rr 000101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE ±�■+ 000103 PROJECT DIRECTORY 000107 SEALS PAGE 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS Jim it PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS �* 00 NP -1 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING 00 AB -1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 NB -1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS 00 I13-1 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 002613 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM irr 00 FP -1 FORM OF PROPOSAL.,., 00 BB -1 BID BOND, CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 AG -1 FORM OF AGREEMENT 00 PB -1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND wr 00 CC -1 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE (ANTI- DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) j. 006513 CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 7> n low 006515 CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION 00 GC -1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 SC -1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 R -1 RESTRICTION ON NON - RESIDENT BIDDING ON NON - FEDERAL -AID PROJECTS SUMMARY 01 1000 SUMMARY .......................... ..............................2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 60 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES .. ............................... 3 01 2100 ALLOWANCES ....................... ..............................1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS ... ..............................5 PF 01 3300 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS ... ..............................3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ........ ............................... 4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 TEMPORARY 1ri FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .......................... 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ........ ............................... 4 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7300 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS ........ ............................... 8 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ........ ............................... 4 DEMOLITION 024100 DEMOLITION ......................... ..............................3 MECHANICAL 230500 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ....................... 9 230523 VALVES ............................ ..............................6 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ............................ .............8 230553 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ......... ..............................4 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING .............................. 20 230713 DUCT INSULATION ................... ..............................3 230719 PIPE INSULATION .................... ..............................3 230923 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS ........................... 33 231123 NATURAL GAS PIPING .................... ..........................5 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING .................... ..............................7 232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS ................... ............................... 3 232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT ............ ............................... 5 233113 METAL DUCTS ........... ............................... ...........7 233300 DUCT ACCESSORIES. ...... ......................... ............. ...7 233616 AIR TERMINAL UNITS .................. ..............................3 235216 CONDENSING BOILERS ............... ............................... 4 236423 AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS ....... ............................... 6 237313 AIR HANDLING UNITS .................... ............................13 ELECTRICAL 260100 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING ...........................2 260126 MAINTENANCE AND TESTING ......... ............................... 2 260500 BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS ............................... 11 260519 WIRE AND CABLE .................... ............................... 3 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING ........... ............................... 2 260533 CONDUITS AND BOXES ................ ..............................7 260533 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ......... ............................... 2 c� Q M CrD cfil L J TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 ow r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 PROJECT TITLE PAGE PM PROJECT MANUAL FOR SENIOR CENTER ADA RESTROOM RENOVATION PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa ISSUE DATE: MARCH 3, 2007 GGI PROJECT NO: IC01 AN IOWA STATE TAX EXEMPT PROJECT THIS PROJECT MANUAL INCLUDES PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS O PREPARED BY `a GESSNER GROUP, INC. -, 123 NORTH LINN �` i -'- -' 1 IOWA CITY, IOWA 52245 QJ END OF PROJECT TITLE PAGE O 0- 60 rrr r. �r 3 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 000101-1 Yr t�Yr NW P+ ii PM iw Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project PROJECT DIRECTORY PROJECT: SENIOR CENTER 28 South Linn Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Contact person: Linda Kopping, Director Craig Buhman, Maintenance Director OWNER: CITY OF IOWA CITY 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Contact Person: Kumi Morris, Architectural Services Coordinator Telephone: (319) 356 -5044 Fax: (319) 356 -5007 e -mail: kumi-morris@iowa-city.org ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS: Mech / Elec GESSNER GROUP, INC. 123 North Linn Street, Iowa City, IA 52245 Telephone: (319) 351 -1349 Fax: (319) 351 -1389 Principal -in- Charge: Gene Gessner Mechanical Engineer: Kevin Kurka e -mail: kevin @gessnergoup.com Electrical Engineer: Matthew Gordon e -mail: mqordon@gessnergroup.com END OF DIRECTORY IC01 U d rv. r7 crt CD PROJECT DIRECTORY 000103-1 �rr 5 r-1 CZD 0 `� C-) .. -;•'� 1 1 z: 'UR, A I 5 I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described herein was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. KWRJ P. KURKA J S16 ge a My license renewal date is December 31, 2009 PaWs or sheets covered by this send ALL SHEETS Date issued: March 3. 2008 r-1 CZD 0 `� C-) .. -;•'� 1 1 I Q I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described herein was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. KWRJ P. KURKA J S16 ge a My license renewal date is December 31, 2009 PaWs or sheets covered by this send ALL SHEETS Date issued: March 3. 2008 I� Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS CS COVER SHEET MD1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN MO MECHANICAL SCHEDULES AND NOTES M1 MECHANICAL BOILER ROOM EQUIPMENT LAYOUT M2 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE EQUIPMENT LAYOUT M3 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE EQUIPMENT LAYOUT M4 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE EQUIPMENT DETAILS M5 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE PIPING PLAN M6 MECHANICAL PIPING ISOMETRIC M7 MECHANICAL THERMOSTAT LOCATIONS ED1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN E1 ELECTRICAL PLANS AND SCHEDULES ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS FROM PREVIOUS WORK PROVIDED FOR INFORMATION ONLY. END LIST OF DRAWINGS SHEETS IC01 0 m LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 1 MR 6 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT IN im THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA pweng\nph\sr ctr boiler.doc r iP R -1 TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED s.n PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct ~__ a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project in said City at 7:00 p.m. on the 11 th day of March, 2008, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of L�. the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may C_q be inspected by any interested persons. Wr Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Coun- cil of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK pweng\nph\sr ctr boiler.doc r iP R -1 �v s.n { - ~__ . L�. CD C_q Q r". 10 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS P" SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT IYri Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, before 11:00 A.M. on the 22nd day of April, 2008. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at its next regular meeting to PE be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 29th day of April, 2008, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. �r The Project will involve the following: Replacing the boiler, air cooled chiller, pumps, air handling units and upgrading the building's HVAC control system. #. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Gessner Group, Inc., of Iowa City, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful j performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to ,�. exceed fifteen (15) calendar days until a contract is awarded, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100 %) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of two (2) year(s) from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City. �*► The following limitations shall apply to this Project: 68 Specified End Date: November 14, 2008; with phase installation dates. The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of OR said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Iowa City Reprographics, Iowa City, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. A $10 non - refundable and $50.00 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Gessner Group, Inc. . Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the Contractor shall furnish documentation of all reasonable, good faith efforts to recruit MBE's. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242- 4721. By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa Reciprocal Preference Act applies to the contract with respect to bidders who are not Iowa residents. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregu- larities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK L pweng\adbidslsr ctr boiler.doc 1,' f i R -1 it i NOTICE TO BIDDERS 1. The successful bidder and all subcontractors are required to submit at least 4 days prior to award three references involving similar projects, including at least one municipal reference. Award of the bid or use of specific subcontractors may be denied if sufficient favorable references are not verified or may be denied based on past experience on projects with the City of Iowa City. 2. References shall be addressed to the City Engineer and include the name, address and phone number of the contact person, for City verification. 3. Bid submittals are: Envelope 1: Bid Bond Envelope 2: Form of Proposal NB -1 i Y+ey Y 6 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding documents include the bidding requirements and the contract documents. The bidding requirements include the Advertisement or Invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, other sample bidding and contract forms, and the Contract Forms including addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.2 The contract documents for the work consist of the Owner /Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications and all addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after execution of the Contract. 1.3 Definitions set forth in AIA document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction ", 1997 edition, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the bidding documents. A. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Engineer prior to execution of 'the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deflection, clarifications or correction. B. A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the bidding documents. C. The base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the work described in the bidding documents as the Base, to which work may be added, or from which work may be deducted for sums stated in alternate bids. D. An alternate bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the base bid if the corresponding change in the work, as described in bidding documents, is accepted. E. A unit price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the bidding documents or in the ppntract documents. l' F. A bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid. - CA) G. A sub - bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a bidder -Jc�_ mat .rialsy equipment or labor for a portion of the work. ARTICLE 2 — BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The bidder by making a bid represents that the bidder has read and understands the bidding documents, and the bid is made in accordance with those documents. 2.2 The Bidder has read and understands the bidding documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the bid is submitted. 2.3 The bidder has visited the site, has become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated the bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the contract documents. 2.4 3.1 l r.� The bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the bidding documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 — BIDDING DOCUMENTS Copies A. Complete sets of the bidding documents may be obtained from the office of the Engineer for the deposit sum as indicated. The deposit will be refunded to plan holders who return the bidding documents in good condition within 30 days after receipt of bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A bidder receiving a contract award may retain the bidding documents, and his deposit will be refunded. Successful sub - bidders, including material suppliers, may retain their bidding documents, and their deposit will be refunded if the Engineer receives written notification within the 30 calendar day period following receipt of bids. B. � riders shall use complete sets of bidding documents in preparing bids. Neither the r. r -Owner nor the Engineer assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of bidding documents. No partial sets will 4 be issued. In making copies of the bidding documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Engineer do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids for the work, and do nor confer license or grant permission for any other use of the bidding documents. D. Copies of the reports and drawings that are not included with the Bidding Documents may be examined at Engineering Division at City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa during regular business hours, or may be obtained from the Owner at Owner's reproduction cost, plus handling charge. These reports and drawings are not part of the contract documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which the bidder may rely as identified and established above, are incorporated therein by reference. Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents A. The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Engineer errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B. Bidders and sub - bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Engineer at least nine days prior to the date for receipt of bids. C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. IB -2 u 0 '"" 3.3 Substitutions A. The materials, products and equipment described in the bidding documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. pa B. Make request for approval of substitute products to the Engineer on "Substitution Request Form" included in the Project Manual. Vagueness of submittal, inadequate warranty, insufficient data and failure to meet project requirements may +*• be cause for rejection of request. Requests must be received at least 10 days prior to date for receipt of bids to receive consideration. B. Approved substitutions will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.4 Addenda A. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Engineer to have a complete set of bidding documents. B. Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection wherever bidding documents are on file for that purpose. No C. No addenda will be issued later than seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids, except for any one or more of the following reasons: 1. An addendum withdrawing the request for bids. 2. An addendum which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids. 3. An addendum issued after receipt of bids and prior to execution of the contract. D. Each bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a bid that he has received all addenda issued, and the bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in t%- groper location on the bid form. C� I ARTICLE 4 — BIDDING PROCEDURES -� 4.1 Form and Style of Bids ? A. Submit bids in duplicate on forms identical to the form bound into, the pM'ect manual. Separate copies of the bid form are contained within the Fuck covgr' of this document. aft B. Fill in all blanks on the bid form by typewriter or manually in ink. wr C. Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and numerals, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words will govern. D. Interlineations, alterations or erasures shall be initialed by the signer of the bid. E. All requested alternates shall be bid. If no change in the base bid is required, enter 0 "No Change ". F. Where two or more bids for designated portions of the work have been requested, the bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of bids stipulated by the bidder. The bidder shall make no additional stipulation on the bid form, nor qualify the bid in any other manner. G. Each copy of the bid shall include the legal name of the bidder and a statement that the bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. A bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to binnl the bidder. H. 1\fb bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the date of c _.opening. 4.2 Bid`$6curity Cz V n c A. r }} Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the amount of ten percent (10 %) of the base bid and in the form of surety bond pledging that the bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner on the items stated in his bid and will, if requested, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Should the bidder refuse to enter into such contract or fail to furnish such bond if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. A cashier's check, cash or certified check will not be an accepted bid bond. B. Surety bond shall be written on enclosed "Bid Bond" form bound within the project manual and the attorney -in -fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of power of attorney. C. The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of bidders to whom an award is being considered until either: 1. The contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished. 2. The specified time has elapsed so that the bids may be withdrawn. 3. All bids have been rejected. 4.3 Submission of Bids A. All copies of the bid, the bid security and other documents required to be submitted with the bid shall be enclosed in sealed opaque envelopes as instructed in Section NB — Note to Bidders. Both envelopes shall be addressed to the party receiving the bids ( "City Clerk, City of Iowa City "), and shall be identified with the project name, the bidder's name and address, and the envelope's contents. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face of that envelope. B. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids. c. J I� �r 1. Location: Office of City Clerk, City Hall, 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 2. Time and Date: Before 11:00 AM local time on April 22, 2007. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. C. The bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of bids. D. Oral, telephonic, or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid A. A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled the bidder after the stipulated time and date designated for the receipt of bids, and each bidder so agrees in submitting his bid. B. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, a bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving bids at the place designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the bidder or by telegram. If by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids, and it shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original bid. C. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. D. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the bid as modified or resubmi*d. ARTICLE 5 — CONSIDERATION OF BIDS s1> t 5.1 Opening of Bids A. The properly identified bids received on time will be opened publicly d will l3k read aloud. y 5.2 Rejection of Bids A. The Owner will have the right to reject any or all bids, and to reject a bid not accompanied by the required bid security or by another data required by the bidding documents, or to reject a bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) A. It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest responsible bidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents, and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner will have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a bid received, and to accept the bid which, in his judgment, is in his own best interest. B. The Owner will have the right to accept bid alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low bidder on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the accepted alternates. IB -5 6.1 Submittals try ti 7.1 ARTICLE 6 — POST -BID INFORMATION A. The bidder shall, within four (4) days of notification of selection for the award of a contract for the work, submit the following information to the Engineer: 1. A designation of the work to be performed by the bidder with the bidder's own forces. 2. The proprietary names and the suppliers or principal items or system of materials and equipment proposed for the project. 3. A list of names of the subcontractors or other persons or entities proposed for the principal portions of the work. B. The bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the work described in the bidding documents. C. Prior to the award of the contract, the Engineer will notify the bidder in writing if either the Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. If the Owner or the Engineer has reasonable objection to such proposed person or entity, the bidder may, at the bidder's option: �' ZT. Withdraw the bid. 2. Submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. r [X- The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or may disqualify the bidder. In the Cj;: r event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. ARTICLE 7 — PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR & MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND Bond Requirements A. The bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Bonds may be secured through the bidder's usual sources. The cost of furnishing such bonds shall be included in the bid. [l L 1� 1 I B. If the Owner requires that bonds be obtained from other than the bidder's usual source, all change in cost will be adjusted as provided in contract documents. 7.2 The Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds A. The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three (3) ' days following the date of execution of the contract. If the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder shall, prior to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered. B. The bonds shall be written on the "Performance and Payment Bond" form bound F :. r w 6W OVA ism i OW A it 6V i l�r YIIIi within the project manual, or a copy thereof. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the contract sum. C. The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the contract. D. The bidder shall require the attorney -in -fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix a current and certified copy of power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 — PRE -BID CONFERENCE 8.1 Conference — Mandatory for Prime Bidders A. Prime Bidders are required to attend a pre -bid conference on Thursday, April 3, 2008, at 1:00 PM local time, at the Senior Center Building in room 208, located at 28 South Linn Street. Prospective subcontractors are encouraged to attend; no other time is available for site examination. 8.2 Parking 1 Limited metered parking is available on neighboring site; otherwise, hourly -fee parking is available in Tower Place, located north of the Senior Center at 335 East Iowa Avenue, the entrance is on the Iowa Avenue side of the ramp. t >^:s irr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM PROJECT: SENIOR CENTER ADA RESTROOM RENOVATION PROJECT MAKE SUBMITTAL DURING THE BIDDING PHASE TO: GESSNER GROUP, INC. 123 NORTH LINN STREET, IOWA CITY, IOWA 52245 BID DATE: APRIL 22, 2008. REQUEST FROM: DATE: / /08 SPECIFICATION SECTION/TITLE: - Description: ; Article /Paragraph: bw Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Trade Name: ; Model: ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS AND ATTACHMENTS In submitting this Request, the Undersigned acknowledges and represents that: rr Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. f. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. VW Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. ^'^ Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. Payment will be made for changes to building design, including design, detailing, and +� construction costs caused by the substitution. Attachments: The following attachments are considered an integral part of the Request: Product Data, descriptions and specifications necessary for evaluation. Drawings necessary to indicate proper installation in the Work. M* Tests and Reports consistent with specified performance requirements. aw Samples: SUBMITTED BY: ,(TITLE) ++ Firm Name: Telephone: Fax: f (rr ENGINEER'S REVIEW AND ACTION Substitution approved — Make submittals in accordance with Specificati 1 s ectj 01'--) 3000 — Administrative Requirements. ` Substitution rejected — use specified materials. 3 -, -- ,,, Reviewed by: Date: END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM iw. SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 1 y rr 0 1. PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. 2. ALL BLANKS TO BE COMPLETED. 3. ONLY BIDS ON THESE FORMS WILL BE ACCEPTED. FORM OF PROPOSAL CITY OF IOWA CITY Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder: BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: 11:00 AM local time on April 22, 2008. TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 l% E_ -7 �r In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT in strict accordance with the Project Manual and the Drawings dated January 7, 2008, including Addenda numbered and , inclusive, prepared by Gessner Group, Inc, for the Base Bid Lump Sum of : BASE BID Dollars ($ ) The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of ten percent (10 %) of the Base Bid amount. CONTROLS CONTRACTOR TO BE ENGAGED AND SYSTEM PROPOSED: BID ALTERNATES: (None) The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract R -1 Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before September 1, 2008. Firm: Signature: _ Printed Name: Title: Address: Phone: Contact: 0 I BID BOND , as Principal, and as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars ($ ) to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This- obligati - is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated = =#br Project. NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for the Principal's faithful performance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects i' perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, �., then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in full force and effect, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the amount of the obligation stated herein. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond, as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such time extension. The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this , A.D., 20. Witness �. Witness m i BB -1 day of (Seal) Principal By (Title) (Seal) Surety By (Attorney -in -fact) Attach Power -of- Attorney ire FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ( "City "), and ( "Contractor "). trr Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the day of 20_, for the Project ( "Project "), and 6W Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. OM 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: OM a. Addenda Numbers ; 68 O• b. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA DOC A201 -1997, as amended; C. Plans;i d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; dft aw e. Notice to Bidders; := f. Note to Bidders; g. Performance and Payment Bond; w„ h. Restriction on Non - Resident Bidding on Non - Federal -Aid Projects; i. Contract Compliance Program (Anti- Discrimination Requirements); r. j. Proposal and Bid Documents; and k. This Instrument. ,.,. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the #W event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. �r AG -1 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): 4. Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. 5. The Contract Amount for this agreement shall be: DATED this day of , 20 NO ATTEST: Mayor City Clerk Q) AG -2 ATTEST: (Title) (Company Official) Approved By: City Attorney's Office M, PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND , as (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and (insert the legal title of the Surety) , as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of Dollars ($ ) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointl}� -And severally. WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of , entered into a W (date) written Agreement with Owner for Project; and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed -upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient PB -1 funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and /or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of ( ) years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third parry other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS DAY OF , 20 IN THE PRESENCE OF: (Principal) Witness (Title) (Surety) Witness (Title) (Street) t (City, State, Zip) r - (Phone) PB -2 0 0 Contract Compliance Program CITY OF IOWA CITY !•. 0 an it It is the policy of the City of Iowa City to require equal employment opportunity in all City contract work. This policy prohibits discrimination by the City's contractors, consultants and vendors and requires them to ensure that applicants seeking employment with them and their employees are treated equally without regard to io race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, gender identity, sexual orientation, disability, marital status, and age. It is the City's intention to assist employers, who are City contractors, vendors or consultants, in designing and implementing equal employment opportunity so that all citizens will be afforded equal accessibility and opportunity to gain and maintain employment. PROVISIONS: 1. All contractors, vendors, and consultants requesting to do business with the City must submit an Equal Opportunity Policy Statement before the execution of the contract. 2. All City contractors, vendors, and consultants with contracts of $25,000 or more (or less if required by another governmental agency) must abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program. Emergency contracts may be exempt from this provision at the discretion of the City. Regardless of the value of the contract, all contractors, vendors, and consultants are subject to the City's Human Rights Ordinance, which is codified at Article 2 of the City Code. 3. Contracting departments are responsible for assuring that City contractors, vendors, and consultants im are made aware of the City's Contract Compliance Program reporting responsibilities and receive the appropriate reporting forms. A notification of requirements will be included in any request for proposal ,. and notice of bids. 4. Prior to execution of the contract, the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (located on pages CC -2 and CC -3) or other required material must be received and approved by the City. w 5. Contracting departments are responsible for answering questions about contractor, consultant and vendor compliance during the course of the contract with the City. r. 6. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must refrain from the use of any signs or designations which are sexist in nature, such as those which state "Men Working" or "Flagman Ahead," and "" instead use gender neutral signs. iis 7. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must assure that their subcontracfO' ,�s abide y the ** City's Human Rights Ordinance. The City's protected classes are listed at IoWi6'- jty C Codq W. Yr section 2 -3 -1. + W i1 4 ._ C y CC -1 SE .TION II - ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCF ' The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. PLEASE RETURN PAGES CC2 AND CC3 OF THIS SECTION TO ' THE CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as follows: ' (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contractor" shall include consultants and vendors.) a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affirmative efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, , marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. b. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the , contractor, state that it is an equal opportunity employer. Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and the ' regulations (see generally 29 U.S.C. § 1608 et seq.) and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orders. 3. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity policy statement. Where is this statement posted? 1 4. What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal Employment Opportunity Officer? (Please print) Phone number Address 5. The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site, all posters required by federal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide assistance in obtaining -4he necessary posters. , CC -2 ON 1w iw E fYr 6. How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? The above responses to questions 1 through 6, are true and correctly reflect our Equal Employment Opportunity policies. Business Name Signature Phone Number Title Print Name Date ko iW CC -3 SECTION III - SUGGESTED STEPS TO ASSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES 1. COMPANY POLICY Determine your company's policy regarding equal employment opportunities. Document the policy and post it in a conspicuous place so that it is known to all your employees. Furthermore, disseminate the policy to all potential sources of employees and to your subcontractors asking their cooperation. The policy statement should recognize and accept your responsibility to provide equal employment opportunity in all your employment practices. In regard to dissemination of this policy, this can be done, for example, through the use of letters to all recruitment sources and subcontractors, personal contacts, employee meetings, web page postings, employee handbooks, and advertising. 2. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY OFFICER Designate an equal employment opportunity officer or, at minimum, assign someone the responsibility of administering and promoting your company's Equal Employment Opportunity program. This person should have a position in your organization which emphasizes the importance of the program. 3. INSTRUCT STAFF Your$taff should be aware of and be required to abide by your Equal Employment Opportunity program. All employees authorized to hire, supervise, promote, or discharge employees or are involved in such actions shod be trained and required to comply with your policy and the current equal employment opportunity iECRiJITMENT c` ? (a) ; _,Let potential employees know you are an equal opportunity employer. This can be done by r' ' ,�� identifying yourself on all recruitment advertising as "an equal opportunity employer ". (b) Use recruitment sources that are likely to yield diverse applicant pools. Word -of -mouth recruitment will only perpetuate the current composition of your workforce. Send recruitment sources a letter annually which reaffirms your commitment to equal employment opportunity and requests their assistance in helping you reach diverse applicant pools. (c) Analyze and review your company's recruitment procedures to identify and eliminate discriminatory barriers. (d) Select and train persons involved in the employment process to use objective standards and to support equal employment opportunity goals. (e) Review periodically job descriptions to make sure they accurately reflect major job functions. Review education and experience requirements to make sure they accurately reflect the requirements for successful job performance. (f) Review the job application to insure that only job related questions are asked. Ask yourself "Is this information necessary to judge an applicant's ability to perform the job applied for ?" Only use job - related tests which do not adversely affect any particular group of people. (g) Monitor interviews carefully. Prepare interview questions in advance to assure that they are only job related. Train your interviewers on discrimination laws. Biased and subjective judgments in personal interviews can be a major source of discrimination. (h) Improve hiring and selection procedures and use non - biased promotion, transfer and training policies to increase and /or improve the diversity of your workforce representation. Companies must make sure procedures for selecting candidates for promotion, transfer and training are based upon a fair assessment of an employee's ability and work record. Furthermore, all companies should post and otherwise publicize all job promotional opportunities and encourage all qualified employees to bid on them. CC -4 M PW d "C� ��III 7►+ 4 '000O City of TPA CN Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 — 3 —1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Federal or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing business with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisions of the local ordinance in conjunction with your performance under a contract with the City. CC -5 _- - 2 -3 -1 SECTION: 2 -3 -1: 2 -3 -2: 2 -3 -3: 2 -3 -4: 2 -3 -5: 2 -3 -1: CHAPTER 3 DISCRIMINATORY PRACTICES Employment; Exceptions Public Accommodation; Exceptions Credit Transactions; Exceptions Education Aiding Or Abetting; Retaliation; Intimidation EMPLOYMENT; EXCEPTIONS: A. It shall be unlawful for any employer to refuse to hire, accept, register, classify, upgrade or refer for employ- ment, or to otherwise discriminate in employment against any other person or to discharge any employee be- cause of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. B. It shall be unlawful for any labor orga- nization to refuse to admit to member- ship, apprenticeship or training an applicant, to expel any member, or to otherwise discriminate against any applicant for membership, apprentice- ship or training or any member in the privileges, rights or benefits of such membership, apprenticeship or train- ing because of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation of such ap- plicant or member. 2 -3 -1 C. It shall be unlawful for any employer, employment agency, labor organiza- tion or the employees or members thereof_ to directly or indirectly adver- tise or in any other manner indicate or publicize that individuals are unwel- come, objectionable or not- solicited for employment or membership be- cause of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95 -3697, 11 -7 -1995) D. Employment policies relating to preg- nancy and childbirth shall be governed by the following: 1. A written or unwritten employment policy or practice which excludes from employment applicants or employees because of the employee's pregnancy Is a prima facie violation of this Title. 2. Disabilities caused or contributed to by the employee's pregnancy, miscar- riage, childbirth and recovery there- from are, for all job - related purposes, temporary disabilities and shall be treated as such under any health or temporary disability insurance or sick leave plan available in connection with employment or any written or unwrit- ten employment policies and practices involving terms and conditions of employment as applied to other tem- porary disabilities. E. it shall be unlawful for any person to solicit or require as a condition of employment of any employee or pro- Iowa City CC -6 897 on M a- 60 2 -3 -1 2 -3 -1 spective employee a test for the pres- 2. An employer or employment agency ence of the antibody to the human which chooses to offer employment or immunodeficiency virus. An agree- advertise for employment to only the ment between an employer, employ- disabled or elderly. Any such employ - ment agency, labor organization or ment or offer of employment shall not their employees, agents or members discriminate among the disabled or and an employee or prospective em- elderly on the basis of age, color, ployee concerning employment, pay creed, disability, gender identity, mari- or benefits to an employee or pro- tal status, national origin, race, reli- ,",,, spective employee in return for taking gion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. a test for the presence of the antibody 95 -3697, 11 -7 -1995) to the human immunodeficiency virus, is prohibited. The prohibitions of this 3. The employment of individuals for subsection do not apply if the State work within the home of the employer epidemiologist determines and the if the employer or members of the Director of Public Health declares family reside therein during such em- ,.. through the utilization of guidelines ployment. established by the Center for Disease Control of the United States Depart- 4. The employment of individuals to ment of Health and Human Services, render personal service to the person that a person with a condition related of the employer or members of the to acquired immune deficiency syn- employer's family. drome poses a significant risk of ,— transmission of the human immunode- 5. To employ on the basis of sex in ficiency virus to other persons in a those certain instances where sex is a specific occupation. bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal F. The following are exempted from the operation of a particular business or M provisions of this Section: enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted nar- ,.- 1. Any bona fide religious institution or rowly. its educational facility, association, corporation- or society with respect to 6. A State or Federal program de- any qualifications for employment signed to benefit a specific age classi- based on religion when such qualifica- fication which serves a bona fide pub - bw tions are related to a bona fide reli- lic purpose. gious purpose. A religious qualifica - tion for instructional personnel or an 7. To employ on the basis of disability administrative officer, serving in a in those certain instances where pres- supervisory capacity of a bona fide ence of disability is a bona fide occu- religious educational facility or reli- pational qualification reasonably nec- '"" gious institution shall be presumed to essary to the normal opern of a r be a bona fide occupational qualifica- particular business or- enterig*e. The tion. (Ord. 94 -3647, 11 -8 -1994) bona fide occupati"t_, qua lcatiop, .. shall be interpreted ia-gowCv (Ord y. bw 94 -3647, 11 -8 -1994) tf i • 897 Iowa City Yrr P" rr CC -7 5 CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROJECT: SENIOR CENTER BOILER & CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT OWNER: CITY OF IOWA CITY Representative: Kumi Morris TO (ENGINEER): GESSNER GROUP, INC. 123 N. LINN, IOWA CITY, IOWA 52245 Attn: KEVIN KURKA FROM: (CONTRACTOR) (Address) Representative: COMPLETION DATE: , 2008 DECLARATION AND REQUEST FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: As of the above date, the construction of the Work of the above Project has progressed sufficiently that the Project (or designated part thereof) can be occupied fy the Owner and utilized for its intended purpose. We understand that occupancy and use of the Work designated as substantially complete shall not constitute Owner acceptance of the Work or portions thereof. The Work to which this declaration of Substantial Completion applies includes the following: CONTRACTOR'S PRE - INSPECTION AND INITIAL PUNCHLIST: In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, We have conducted an inspection of the designated Work for conformance with the Contract Documents. A comprehensive list of incomplete work and items needed correction includes the following: z ro 0 i }} �J 0 r; s._ 0 i }} �J 0 r; We understand that failure to include an item on the above list does not alter Our responsibility to complete all Work in conformance with the Contract Documents. The above items will be completed or corrected within days of the date of this Notice. Please schedule and conduct the Architect's inspection as required to verify the status of the Work. ATTACHMENTS: We have attached evidence of Inspection and Acceptance of the following Authorities having Jurisdiction: Building Inspector: Y N Fire Marshal: Y N SUBMITTED BY: (Contractor's Name) By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) END OF DOCUMENT 1 CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION PROJECT: SENIOR CENTER BOILER & CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJ OWNER: CITY OF IOWA CITY Representative: Kumi Morris TO (ARCHITECT): GESSNER GROUP, INC. f 123 N. LINN, IOWA CITY, IOWA, 52245' l Attn: KEVIN KURKA SUBMITTED BY: (CONTRACTOR) (Address) `` Representative: - cti CONTRACT FOR: General Construction CONTRACT DATE: , 2008 CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION: We, the undersigned, do hereby certify that: The Work provided pursuant to the Contract Documents for the above Project has been inspected and determined to be complete and in compliance with provisions of the Contract Documents. The following Supporting Documents have been fully executed (in duplicate) and are included with this Statement: FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS (AIA Doc. G706) AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS (AIS Doc. G706A) CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT (AIA Doc. G707) INSURANCE CERTIFICATE FOR COMPLETED OPERATIONS (ACORD Form 25 -S) (Contractor's Name) By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) ENGINEER'S RECOMMENDATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK: The undersigned, Architect of the above designated Project, hereby state that: The Work performed by (Contractor) under this Contract has been reviewed and found, L. to the Architect's best knowledge, information, and belief, to be in substantial compliance with provisions of the Contract Documents. The Certificate for Final Payment is a complete and accurate summary of the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all changes and modifications thereto. The total cost of the Work as completed is $ I recommend, under the provision of the Contract Documents, that the Work be accepted and that final payment be made: GESSNER GROUP, INC. Date Yr (Authorized Representative) (Title) OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK: .. The undersigned, on behalf of , hereby affirms that the Work performed by pursuant to the above referenced Contract is accepted and final payment has been authorized in i" accordance with provisions of the Contract. By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) j r END OF DOCUMENT �. Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 GENERAL CONDITIONS FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS rr �. AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 1997 Edition, attached, is the General Conditions between the Owner and contractor. r. Refer to Document 00 SC -1 — supplementary Conditions, for amendments to those General Conditions. The General Conditions may also be supplemented elsewhere in the Contract Documents by provisions located in, but not necessarily limited to, Sections in Division 1 of the Specifications. 11ri r• it r �Yr r D 60 �v rrr it W s GENERAL CONDITIONS 007200-1 lr 0 " Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 I�r SECTION 00 800 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION A. The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction ", AIA Document A201 -1997. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. B. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. C. Deletions from the AIA A201 are indicated as s#ftlte -eat and additions to the AIA A201 are indicated as "bold italic ". D. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of ,�.. appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. E. Delete all references to mediation and arbitration in their entirety. 1.2 ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Add the following paragraph 1.1.1.1 Contract Documents to read as follows: 1.1.1 Any reference within the Contract Documents of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor should be substituted with of the Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement). The Form of Agreement is listed as AG in the project manual. B. Change paragraph 1.1.3 to read as follows: 1.1.3 The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, tools, materials, equipment, transportation, services, taxes, insurance and all other services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. �!Pe Wor Dnay constitute the whole or a part of the Project. The Contractor shall provide all wc7-"Pd materials which any part of the Contract Documents require him to provider'' - -E -� C. Add the following paragraph 1.2.4: t 1.2.4 Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements, govern the execution of "all sections of the specifications. 1.3 ARTICLE 2 -OWNER r' J A. Change paragraph 2.4.1 to read as follows: 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the y"' Contract Documents and fails within a seven -day period after reeeipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may netiee -fe without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -1 t'r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 I Gwner n9ay, without prejudiee to other remedies the E)wner may have, eeffeet sueh detweienei In such case the Owner may deduct from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the entire cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses and heating, engineering, accounting, consulting services and attorneys' fees and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Owner's actions pursuant to this Subparagraph shall not operate as a release of any obligation of a surety. 1.4 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR A. Change paragraphs 3.2.1 through 3.2.2 to read as follows: 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knowing' failed to report it to the Architect. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knewing it-invelaes involving a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume appmpriete responsibility for such performance and shall bear an costs for correction. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. B. Change paragraph 3.3.2 to read as follows: 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors, materialmen and suppliers and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. C. Change paragraph 3.4.1 to read as follows: 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to c.� be incorporated in the Work. Should the Contract Documents require work to be performed aftar regular working hours or should the Contractor elect to perform work after regular ' Joprs, the additional cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor. D Add the following paragraphs 3.4.4 through 3.4.6: Whenever any provisions of the Contract conflict with any agreements or regulation oTany kind in force among members of any trade association, unions or councils, which regulate what work shall be included in the work of particular trades, the Contractor shall Oake all necessary arrangements to reconcile any such conflict without delay or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. 3.4.5 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in Section 0160 00 - Post Bid Substitutions. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -2 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 3.4.6 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above, the Contractor. .1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. .2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified. .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. E. Change paragraphs 3.5.1 to read as follows: 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent 0 quality required or permitted; and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. F. Change paragraph 3.7.2 to read as follows: 3.7.2 The Contractor shall eernpl perform the Work in compliance with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. G. Change paragraph 3.7.4 to read as follows: 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, t,�I e Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the ccs and expenses of correcting or replacing such Work. '1 H. Change paragraph 3.11.1 to read as follows: 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner, one record copy of- , e -pravWAgs, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and'r arke4,. ` currently to record changes and selections made during construction, and in additlegAll approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittali,--`> hese Mall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal tope Owner, upon completion of the Work. n'' I. Change paragraph 3.13.1 to read as follows: +�^ 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. The Contractor acknowledges that the property on which the Project and Work are located will be occupied and in use by the Owner during the execution of the Work. The Contractor shall perform and coordinate its work in such a manner that the portions of the property occupied and in use will not be encumbered or the use interfered with or interrupted. 6 J. Change paragraph 3.17.1 to read as follows: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -3 pP" iir Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 , 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from , loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such ' loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect and the Owner in writing. K. Change paragraph 3.18.1 to read as follows: 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including, but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property including loss of use resulting there from, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by intentional or negligent acts or ' omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by 011 etsueh them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. Nothing in the foregoing Paragraph 3.18.1 is intended or shall be deemed to constitute an indemnification by the Contractor against the negligence of any of the parties to be otherwise indemnified pursuant to __2 Paragraph 3.18.1. 3.18.2 Contractor is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an agent or employee of the City of Iowa City, Iowa. L. Change 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES paragraph 3.3.4 to read as follows: Contractor shall maintain a qualified and responsible person available 24 hours per day, seven days per week to respond to emergencies which may occur after hours. CONTRACTOR shall provide to Owner and Architect the phone number and/or paging service of this individual. M. Change TAXES 3.6 paragraph 3.6.1 to read as follows: Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certificate to purchase building materials, supplies, or equipment in the performance of the contract. The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. 1.5 ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Change paragraph 4.1.2 to read as follows: 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Gentraeter and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -4 h Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 B. Change paragraph 4.2.1 to read as follows: 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner's representative as provided herein (1) during construction, and (2) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. C. Change paragraph 4.2.3 to read as follows: 4.2.3 The Architect and the Owner will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect and the Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. D. Change paragraphs 4.2.5 through 4.2.6 to read as follows: 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and eef* recommend to the Owner the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to recommend to the Owner to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work. E. Change paragraphs 4.2.10 through 4.2.12 to read as follows: 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project_ representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. -Oe dutieo; 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and make recommendations to the Owner regard g deem matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents"-pn writtenrZ, request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which recommendations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay Shall not bee reeegnized on aeeount of failure by the Arehiteet to furnish sueh interpretations unto! 15 days af written request *9 Fnade for thern. The Architect shall furnish such recommendations within such reasonable time after the request is made that allow sufficient time in the professional judgment of the Architect for review. 4.2.12 Interpretations and recommendations decisfens of the Architect will be consistent with iW the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawing. When making such interpretations and recommendations deeisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or recommendations SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS "" DOCUMENT 00800 -5 4w Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 ' deeisions so rendered in good faith. F. Change paragraphs 4.3.1 through 4.3.5 to read as follows: 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the Parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other similar relief with respect to the administration terrors of the Contract during the performance of the Work. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. Nothing in this Article is intended to limit claims by the Owner related to the performance of or quality of the Work. 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim relating to the same subject matter made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered and is deemed waived by the Contractor 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim ineluding arbitration, unless otherwise agreed in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments for sums not in dispute in accordance with the Contract Documents. G. Delete paragraph 4.6 ARBITRATION in its entirety (paragraphs 4.6.1 thru 4.6.6). H. The Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under (Ili no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. 1* ART#CLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS _ C.J A Delete paragraph 5.2.1 and add the following: C- 2.1 The CONTRACTOR shall provide, within 24 hours of the bid opening, a list those ersons, firms, companies or other parties to whom it proposes/intends to enter into a subcontract regarding this project as required on the Bid Form and the Agreement. 1. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. B. Change paragraph 5.3.1 to read as follows: 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -6 h Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub - subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub - subcontractors. All warranties provided by the Subcontractors, including all express and implied warranties in the Contract Documents and the agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors and all warranties provided by law, shall run to and be for the benefit of the Owner, and the Owner shall have a direct right of action against the Subcontractors for any breach of said warranties. 1.7 ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. Delete paragraph 6.1.4 in its entirety. B. Change paragraph 6.2.4 to read as follows: 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wfengiully caused by the-, ntracto to A,; completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separktecontractors , as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5.: 1.8 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK A/ - A. Change paragraph 7.2.1 to read as follows: 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by*e Owner and Contractor and approved by the Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: B. Add paragraph 7.2.3 as follows: 7.2.3 A Change Order is conclusively presumed to include all adjustments in Contract Time and Contract Sum necessary to complete the change to the Work and related parts of the Work. C. Add paragraph 7.2.4 as follows: 7.2.4 In all Change Orders or Construction Change Directives, the allowance for Overhead and profit to be included in the total cost to the Owner shall not exceed the following amounts: ,.. 1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, fifteen percent (1591o) of the cost. .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, ten percent (1096) of the amount due the Subcontractor. .3 For each Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by it such contractor's own forces, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Sub - subcontractors, five percent (5 916) of the amount due the Sub - subcontractor. 5 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. In no case will a change involving over $200.00 be approved without such io itemization. .6 Unless otherwise agreed, costs to which overhead and profit are to be applied shall be those costs listed in Subparagraph 7.3.6. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -7 %r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 ' 1.9 ARTICLE 8 -TIME A. Change paragraph 8.2.3 to read as follows: 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract time. The Contractor shall bear all costs for overtime and all additional expense which may arise in order to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. B. Add paragraph 8.2.4 to read as follows: 8.2.4 If, upon the recommendation of the Architect, it becomes necessary at times during construction for the Owner to accelerate the work, each Contractor or subcontractor when ordered and directed by the Owner, shall cease work at any point and shall transfer his men to such points and execute such portion of his work as may be required to enable others to properly engage in and carry on their work. C. Change paragraph 8.3.1 to read as follows: 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay On deloveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay autherized by the Owner pending afbitration, or by other eauses whieh the Arehiteet determines may justify Bela t, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the- Qwner, with the advice of the Architect, may determine. Such delays shall not be a basis for damages. An extension of the Contract Time is the Contractor's sole remedy for such delay. l�. Delete paragraph 8.3.3 in its entirety. 1.10 -ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 4A. Add the following paragraph 9.3.1.3. .3 The first payment application shall be accompanied by Contractor's partial waiver of lien only, for the full amount of the payment. Each subsequent monthly payment application shall be accompanied by the Contractor's partial waiver and by the partial waivers of Subcontractors and Suppliers who were included in the immediately preceding payment application to the extent of that payment. Application for final payment shall be accompanied by final waivers of lien from the Contractor, Subcontractor and Suppliers who have not previously furnished such final waivers. B. Change paragraph 9.4.1 to read as follows: 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. Nothing herein shall be construed as requiring the Architect to reduce the retainage to be applied to payment applications. All certifications and payments, including those pursuant to a pending claim, shall be tentative and conditional and it shall not be necessary for the Architect to make any statement to this effect. C. Add paragraph 9.4.2.1 as follows: 9.4.2.1 The Architect's determination as to the issuance of or withholding of or the amount of payment reflected on Certificates of Payment shall subject the Architect to no liability whatsoever to the Owner, Contractor, Surety, or any other person. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -8 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 r D. Change paragraph 9.6.1 to read as follows: 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make partial payments to the Contractor on or about the 15th day of each month. To insure proper performance of the Contract, the Owner will retain 5% of each payment amount or such larger amount as will insure that there always remains a sufficient balance to complete the work, such retainage to be held until Final Acceptance of Work and shall so notify the Architect. Payment in the manner and within the tome provided in the Gentraet Doeurnents, a shall so metify the Arehiteet-. E. Change paragraph 9.10.3 to read as follows: 9.-103 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion there of is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. The making e! tonal payment shall eenstitute a WaiVeF of elaims by the G 'jed in Subparagraph 4.3:5. F. Add paragraph 9.10.5 to read as follows: Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in this Contract, final payment of the retainage due the Contractor will be made not earlier than 31 days from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner, subject to the conditions and in accordancevith the provisions of Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa, 2005, as amended 1.11 ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Add paragraph 10.1.1.2.: r. . The Contractor will provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all hazardous, ; chemicals or materials that will be at the job site. The Material Safety Data Sheets i0i bey,_; submitted to the Owner prior to the start of construction and supplemented as rt ssaryun throughout the project. This data is being provided for informational purposes 0 -- and N does not relieve the contractor of any obligations for compliance with applicable OSHA and State laws regarding hazardous chemicals and right -to -know. B. Add paragraph 10.2.4.1: When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or u unusual methods are necessary, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice. C. Add paragraph 10.2.8: 10.2.8 When required by law or for the safety of the Work, the Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin and protect foundations and other portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work. The Contractor, before commencement of any part of the Work, shall give any notices required to be given to adjoining landowners or other parties. y,r 1.12 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -9 �r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project CC, I A. Change paragraph 11.1.1.5 to read as follows: .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including explosion, collapse and damage to underground utilities and loss of use resulting therefrom; B. Change paragraph 11. 1.2 to read as follows: 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverage whether shall be written on an occurrence or elairns Fna a basis and shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. C. Change paragraph 11. 1.3 to read as follows: 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work, and to be in effect for the full contract period. The name, address and phone number of the insurance company and agent must accompany the certificate. The liability limits required hereunder must apply to this Project only. These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverage afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment creel -are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in aeeordanee with the Gentraeter's information and b c� D. Add the following paragraphs 11.1.4 through 11.1.12: 4.1.4 Any policy or policies of insurance purchased by the Contractor to satisfy his/her responsibilities under this contract shall include contractual liability coverage, and shall be in the fs)bwirigtype and minimum amounts: Tvoe of Coverage Comprehensive General Liability Each Occurrence 2.Aggregate Bodily Injury & Property Damage* $1,000,000 $2,000,000 Automobile Liability Combined Single imit Bodily Injury & Property Damage $1,000,000 Excess Liability $1,000,000 $1,000,000 Worker's Compensation Insurance as required by Chapter 85, Code of Iowa. *Property Damage liability insurance must provide explosion, collapse and underground coverage when determined by City to be applicable. 11. 1.5 The City requires that the Contractor's Insurance carrier be A rated or better by A.M. Best. In addition, the Contractor shall be required to comply with the following provisions with respect to insurance coverage: 11. 1.6 The entire amount of Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits, identified in the policy and in the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the policy, be SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -10 I D Fm Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 rr available to pay damages for which the insured Contractor becomes liable, or for which the insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such coverage amount shall not be subject to reduction or set off by virtue of investigation or defense costs incurred by Contractor's insurer. to 11.1.7 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits ' shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self - insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the City. Contractor's Certificate of Insurance must set forth the nature and amount of rr any such deductible or self - insured retention. *+ 11. 1.8 If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or k` limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance. 11. 1.9 The Contractor shall include the City as additional insured on all policies except workers compensation. 11.1.10 The City prefers that Contractor provide it with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. If Contractor can only provide "claims- made" insurance coverage, then �r the Contractor must comply with the following requirements: 0M A. If the Contractor changes insurance carriers, or if Contractor's in ance 40 coverage is canceled, during the contract period or within two ye flter ('etyIs acceptance of the work, Contractor agrees to immediately notify threity of such I am event. , B. If Contractor's insurance is canceled or is allowed to lapse during "` sSid period, A- Contractor shall be required to obtain replacement insurance coverag to 00111 its obligation hereunder. C. If, during said period, Contractor voluntarily changes insurance carriers or is required to obtain replacement coverage from another carrier, Contractor shall either (1) purchase "tail" coverage from its first carrier effective for a minimum of two years after City Council acceptance of the work, or (2) purchase "prior acts" insurance coverage from its new carrier, covering prior acts during the period of this Contract from and after its inception. D. "Tail" or "prior acts" coverage so provided shall have the same coverage, with the same limits, as the insurance specified in this Contract, and shall not be rr subject to any further limitations or exclusions, or have a higher deductible or self - insured retention than the insurance which it replaces rW 11.1.10 The City reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. The City also reserves the right to reject Contractor's insurance if not in compliance with the requirements herein provided, and on that basis to either award the contract to the next low bidder, or declare a default and seek specific performance or termination, as the case may be. r 11.1.11 In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, or in the event that Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance, then in that SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -11 �r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.11 In the event that any of the policies or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.12 Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible amounts; including but not limited to the owner's deductible on the owner's builder's risk. E. Delete paragraphs 11.4.1 through 11.4.12; add paragraphs 11.4.1 through 11.4.5 as follows: r> r 11.4.- 1.OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as ` maybe provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). Thip insurance shall: include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Owner's ` (Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the :z:�upplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed 2(�io have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all- risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. include $ 500,000 for materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by OWNER; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER; 6. include testing and startup; and 7, be maintained in effect until final payment is made. 8. Such coverage shall not include coverage for loses or damage caused by the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor or Subcontractors, or for damage to material or equipment while under the control of or stored by Contractor prior to installation or prior to inclusion of such material or equipment in construction. Contractor shall maintain appropriate insurance for such risks or occurrences 11.4.2 OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance which shall specifically cover such insured objects or additional property insurance as may be required by Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, OWNER's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -12 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 11.4.3 All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions. 11.4.5 If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if possible, 6 include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. F. Change paragraph 11.5.1 to read as follows: 11.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond from a surety using the form included in the Contract Documents, each in amount equal to the Contract Price. Cost of such Bonds shall be include in the `use bid. Each alternative bid shall include the additional Bond cost. Contrar,shall '&liver the required Bonds to the Owner prior to the signing of the Agreement. - =' G. Delete paragraph 11.5.2 in its entirety. H. Add the following paragraphs 11.5.1.1 through 11.5.1.6: .1 The Performance, Labor and Material Bond shall be executed in confor�iity with #fie American Institute of Architect's Document A -312 (1984 Edition), with coveragrprovidba by a surety having a policy holder's rating of "A" and a minimum class of 15 financing rating in the Best Insurance Guide, latest edition. .2 Whenever the Contractor shall be and is declared by the Owner to be in default under the Contract, the Surety and Contractor are each responsible to make full payment to the Owner for any and all additional services of the Architect as defined in the Owner /Architect Agreement which are required as a result of the Contractor's default and in protecting the Owner's right under the agreement with the Contractor to remedy the Contractor's default or honor the terms of the Performance Bond. .3 These Bonds shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall remain in full force and effect until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. The Contractor agrees and will cause the Surety to agree to be bound by each and every provision of all the Contract Documents. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -13 .4 The Surety shall give written notice to Owner, within seven (7) days after receipt of a declaration of default, of the Surety's election either to remedy the default or defaults itr promptly or to perform the work promptly or to pay to Owner the penal sum of the bond, time being of the essence. In said notice of election, the Surety shall indicate the date on +�* which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to Owner immediately upon completion of (a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction of each omitted item of work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the work. The Surety shall not assert solvency of its Principal or its 6 Principal's denial of default as justification for its failure to promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the work. .5 The Principal and Surety further agree as part of this obligation to pay all such SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -13 h Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 damages of any kind to person or property that may result from a failure in any respect to perform and complete the Work including, but not limited to, all repair and replacement costs necessary to rectify construction error, architectural and engineering costs and fees, all consultant fees, all testing and laboratory fees, and all legal fees and litigation ' costs incurred by the Owner. timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may ' .6 The Surety agrees that other than as is provided in the Bond it may not demand of ' the Owner that the Owner shall (a) perform any thing or act, (b) give any notice, (c) furnish any clerical assistance, (d) render any service, (e) furnish any papers or ' documents, or (f) take any other action of any nature or description which is not required of the Owner to be done under the Contract Documents. I. Add the following paragraph 11.5.3: 11.5."urety shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall be authorized to do business in ' the state of Iowa. 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS , ARTICLE - A. \- _.Change paragraph 13.3.1 to read as follows: _).3.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the rirdividual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. ' B. Change paragraph 13.5.1 to read as follows: 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall ' bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may ' observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which ' do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. Copies of all reports, data and other documents related to tests, inspections and approvals shall be ' provided to the Architect as soon as practicable. C. Delete paragraphs 13.7.1 through 13.7.1.3: D. Add the following to Article 13: 13.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows: .1 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. ' The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or ' state ordinance. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for ' training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non - discrimination. .2 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or ' SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT 00800 -14 w Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance 13.9.1 The Contractor shall maintain CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM (ANTI DISCRIMINATION REQUIRENTS) as follows: 1. For all contracts of $25,000 or more, the Contractor shall abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program, which is included with these Specifications beginning on page CC -1. 1.14 ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT A. Change paragraph 14.2.1.4 to read as follows: .4 Otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents; or B. Add the following paragraph 14.2.1.5: .5 fails or refuses to provide insurance or proof of insurance as required by the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 14.2.4 to read as follows: 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. The Contractor shall bear all testing, engineering, accounting, and legal expenses made necessary as a result of termination of the Contract. END OF DOCUMENT 00800 d -1 �{7 L� SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS f DOCUMENT 00800 -15 lirr N RESTRICTION ON NON - RESIDENT BIDDING ON NON - FEDERAL -AID PROJECTS PROJECT NAME: TYPE OF WORK: DATE OF LETTING: A resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a non - resident bidder from a state or foreign country which gives or requires a preference to bidders from that state or foreign country. That preference is equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the non - resident bidder is a resident. "Resident bidder" is defined as a person authorized to transact business in this state and having a place of business within the state, and has conducted business for at least six months prior to the first advertisement for the public improvement. In the case of a corporation, the above requirements apply as well as the requirement that the corporation have at least fifty percent of its common stock owned by residents of this state. This qualification as resident bidder shall be maintained by the bidder and his /her contractors and subcontractors at the work site until the project is completed. I hereby certify that the undersigned is a resident bidder as defined above and will remain such from the start of the project until its completion. COMPANY NAME: CORPORATE OFFICER: TITLE: DATE: R -1 .._ s I , _ t i f� /� r•S1 60 flrr irr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL � r4 ., yak 1.1 PROJECT A. Project Name: SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT, �~ v B. Owner's Name: CITY OF IOWA CITY. C. Engineer's Name: Gessner Group, Inc., Iowa City, Iowa. D. The Project consists of removal and replacement of the existing boiler, chiller, air handling, and building controls systems as shown on the drawings. 1.2 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document 0 5215 — Agreement Form with General Conditions. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK A. Scope of demolition and removal work is shown on drawings and specified in Section 02 4100. B. HVAC: Alter existing systems and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. C. Plumbing: Alter existing systems and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. D. Electrical Power and Lighting: Alter existing systems and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. E. Fire Supression Sprinklers: Alter existing systems and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. F. Fire Alarm: Alter existing systems and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. 1.4 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The City of Iowa City intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire construction period. B. City of Iowa City intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. C. Cooperate with City of Iowa City to minimize conflict and to facilitate City of Iowa City's operations. D. Schedule the Work to accommodate City of Iowa City occupancy. SUMMARY 01 1000-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Parking for Construction Vehicles: Limited metered parking is available; obtain meter hoods from the Parking Department. Obtain all permits, permissions, and coordination required to , close down City streets and alleys for use during demolition or construction processes. C. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. City of Iowa City occupancy. 2. Use of site and premises by the public. D. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by City of Iowa City: ' 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. E. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage without express permission from the City of Iowa City. F. Time Restrictions: 1. Limit conduct of especially noisy exterior work to times as scheduled with the Owner. 2. Limit conduct of especially noisy interior work to times as scheduled with the Owner. ' G. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Do not disrupt or shut down life safety systems, including but not limited to fire sprinklers ' - -and fire alarm systems, without 7 days notice and approval to City of Iowa City and --authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. 1,16- -,VY1 RK SEQUENCE: -lA Schedule demolition to occur such that installation of new equipment will occur immediately C won completion. B. Demolish equipment serving the Kitchen last and replace that equipment first as a part of construction sequence to minimize Kitchen down time due lack of makeup air. Startup makeup air systems temporarily as required to prevent down time. , C. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with the City of Iowa City. D. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with the Engineer. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED ' PART 3 - EXECUTION — NOT USED END OF SECTION 1 SUMMARY , 01 1000-2 IN 3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 012000 — PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedure for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payment. B. Change procedures. IC01 r'n Li Yy, 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 00 5215 — Agreement with General Conditions: Contract sum, payment period. B. Section 00 7315 — Supplementary Conditions: Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 — Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form will also be considered. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 7 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance, and Contractor's overhead and profit. D. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders with each Application for Payment. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT A. Make applications for progress payments in amounts equal to ninety -five percent of the value of work completed, including cost of materials and equipment properly stored at the job site, less the amount of previous payment. B. Payment period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. C. Present required information in typewritten form. D. Form AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 — Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. F. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored products. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 G. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of work. H. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. Include the following with the application: 1. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 3000 — Administrative Requirement. 2. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 3. Affidavits attesting to offsite stored products. l J. When Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in qu estion. 'J Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. t' 1s5 M .6DtFtCAITON PROCEDURES A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the W orlr. B. Engineer will advise of minor changes in the work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on the Engineer's form. C. Construction Change Directive: Engineer may issue a document, signed by the City of Iowa City, instruction Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe changes in the work, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change in Work. D. Proposal Request: Engineer may issue a document which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation for any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 15 days. E. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Engineer, describing the proposed change and its full effect of the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 6000. F. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: 1. For change requested by Engineer for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For a change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by the Architect. 3. For pre- determined unit prices and quantities, the amount will be based on the fixed unit prices. 4. For change ordered by the Engineer without a quotation from the Contractor, the amount will be determined by the Engineer based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000-2 r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 pop r G. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. *- 1. On request, provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. C. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for a change in Contract Time. irr e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information. a. Origin and date of claim. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. C. Time records and wage rates paid. d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 3. For time and material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. H. Execution of Change Orders: Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. I. After execution of the Change Order, promptly revise schedule of values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. J. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any changes in Contract Time, revise sub - schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. K. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.6 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Final Payment shall be the remaining balance of five percent of the final contract sum (contract retainage). B. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. C. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7300 — Execution Requirements and Section 01 7700 Closeout Procedures. 2. Owner's written acceptance of the completed Work. D. Final Payment shall become due following the Owner's final acceptance of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION — NOT USED �. • END OF SECTION ° c,1 V;,-. w 60 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000-3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 012100 — ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contingency allowance. IC01 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 2000 — Price and Payment Procedures: Additional payment and modification procedures. 1.3 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE A. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, bonding, equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Contingency Allowance. B. Funds will be drawn from the Contingency Allowance only by Change Order. C. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order. 1.4 ALLOWANCE SCHEDULE A. Contingency Allowance: Include the stipulated sum /price of $75,000 for use upon Owner's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION — NOT USED END OF SECTION ALLOWANCES 01 2100-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 013000 — ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Construction progress schedule. D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. E. Number of copies of submittals. F. Submittal procedures. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 00 5215 — General Conditions with Supplementary Conditions. B. Section 01 7300 — Execution Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C. Section 01 7700 — Closeout Procedures: Project Record Documents. 1.3 ENGINEER'S DIGITAL DRAWINGS A. Digital files of "Background Drawings" are available from the Engineer for the expressed use by the Contractor, and the designated subcontractors and suppliers, n the construction of the Work and the preparation of shop drawings. 1.4 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project Coordinator: Owner's designated contact person. B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices, for construction access, traffic, and parking facilities. C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the project coordinator. D. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for the temporary utilities and construction facilities. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Contractor will schedule a meeting after Owner's "Notice to Proceed." B. Attendance Required: 1. City of Iowa City. 2. Engineer. 3. Contractor. 4. Major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, the Owner's jobsite representative, the Contractor's key administrative and field personnel, and the Engineer. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. I . Contfactor will record minutes and distribute copies within 3 days after the meeting to participants, with two copies to City of Iowa City, Contractor participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.2 CQM1tTRACTOR'S PROGRESS MEETINGS A. :Schedule and administer meetings throughout the progress of Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, City of Iowa City, Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-2 OM 1r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project A• 12. Other business relating to the Work. I C01 E. Record minutes and distribute copies within 3 days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Engineer, City of Iowa City, participants, and those affected by decisions made. io 3.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE �^ A. Withing 7 days of date established in Notice to Proceed, submit preliminary schedule. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 7 days. C. Within 7 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Within 7 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Incorporate the following schedule for contract closeout: 1. Closeout Meeting: Schedule at least 15 days prior to anticipated date of Substantial ++� Completion. Submit initial copy of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for review. 2. Demonstration and Instruction: Schedule at least 15 days prior to substantial completion. *' 3. Contractor's Punchlist and Notification of Substantial Completion: Submit at least 10 days prior to anticipated date of Substantial Completion. Engineer will schedule verification inspection of Work within 5 days of receipt Contractors Notice of Substantial Completion. 4. Closeout Submittals: See Section 01 7700 — Closeout Procedures. Submit within 7 days following Substantial Completion. 5. Final Change Order: Engineer will prepare and issue within 5 days after Substantial Completion. 6. Contractor's Notice of Final Completion: Engineer will schedule Final Inspection of the Work within 5 days of receipt of Contractor's Notice. 7. Engineer will issue Final Certificate for Payment upon Owners Final Acceptance of the Work. F. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.4 SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Bar Charts: Include separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. _ B. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date of each activity. Identify..ezich ac'�'vity = - with the applicable specification section number. ` C. Sheet Size: Multiples of 8- 1/2x11 inches. D. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions. 3.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW rr A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product Data. +a 2. Shop Drawings. 3. Samples for Selection. ibo ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-3 L Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 4. Samples for Verification. B. Submit to Engineer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 -7800 — CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design Data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test Reports. 4. Inspection Reports. 5. Manufacturer's Instructions. 6. Manufacturer's Field Reports. B. Submit for Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator for City of Iowa City. No action will be taken. -3.7 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A• When:.the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. -Operation and Maintenance Data. - Warranties. 4. ;Bonds. B. Submit for City of Iowa City's benefit during and after project completion. 3.8 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for review: 1. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Engineer. B. Documents for Information: Submit 2 copies. C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make three reproductions of submittal originally reviewed. Submit one extra of submittals for information. D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual sections; one of which will be retained Engineer. 3.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with approved form. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-4 r"* Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 itr B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with the original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents. E. Deliver submittals to Engineer at business address. F. Schedule submittals to expedite the project, and coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. I. Provide space for Contractor and Engineer review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-5 h 7" 6 s Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 013300 — CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction Submittals for Review and Information B. Preparation of Construction Submittals C. Review of Construction Submittals 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 3000 — Administrative Requirements: Processing Submittals. B. Section 01 7700 — Closeout Procedures: Closeout Submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS IC01 A. Construction Submittals for Review: Submittals required by individual specification sections relating to a portion of the work which must be acted upon by the Engineer before work on that portion begins. 1. Shop Drawings: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, and schedules specifically prepared by the Contractor to illustrate and depict some portion of the work more clearly and in greater detail. 2. Coordination Drawings: Drawings prepared by the Contractor to show how multiple - system and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated to avoid conflicts resulting from available space requirements. 3. Product Data: Illustrations, standard schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures that illustrate physical appearance, size, and other characteristics of materials and equipment for some portion of the work. 4. Samples: Physical examples of materials and workmanship which illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material and establish the standards by which the work will be judged. B. Construction Phase Submittals for Information: Submittals required by individual specification sections; submit for Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken. 1. Design Data: Performance requirements and material characteristics providing the basis for portions of the work designed by the Contractor. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports 4. Inspection Reports 5. Manufacturer's Instructions. 6. Manufacturer's Field reports. CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 01 3300-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE PARTICIPANTS l C01 A. Contractor: 1. Read and understand the Contract Documents. 2. Establish a realistic submittal schedule that allows for resubmittal. 3. Coordinate the submittals. 4. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents, site conditions, dimensions and construction means and methods; indicate any part fot he submittal that does not conform to the contract requirements. 5. Approve submittals prior to transmitting them to the Engineer. 6. Distribute approved submittals to subcontractors and others. 7. Maintain copies of approved submittals at the jobsite for reference, and retain copy of approved submittals for Owner's records. 8. Maintain transmittal log and track progress. B. Subcontractors and Suppliers: 1. Read and understand the Contract Documents. 2. Properly prepare complete and accurate submittals with extraneous information deleted. 3. Submit in a timely manner based on construction schedule and allowing adequate time for Contractor and Engineer review. 4. Maintain records and current status. C. Engineer: 1. Specify reasonable requirements. 2. Read and understand the Contract Documents. 3. Verify that the Contractor has reviewed, stamped, and approved submittals. 4. Review submittals for conformance with design intent. 5. Approve submittals in a timely manner, or take appropriate action. 6. Maintain a copy of approved submittals, and forward a copy to Owner on request. 7. Maintain a submittal log and track progress. D. Owner: 1. Read and understand the Contract Documents. 2. Coordinate work to be completed under a separate contract. 3. Follow project requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. PROCESSING SUBMITTALS Refer to Section 01 3000 for additional requirements. Group submittals related to building elements or systems together for transmittal in accordance with submittal schedule. Only specified submittals will be reviewed by the Engineer. CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 01 3300-2 ' it oft 1W Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 3.2 SUBMITTAL PREPARATION A. To aid in tracking and filing, each submittal shall contain the following information: 1. Project name and project number. 2. Date Submitted 3. Description of the item submitted 4. Specification section reference number 5. A consecutive submittal number. B. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents. The purpose of these submittal shall be one of the following: 1. For approval 2. For information only 3. Resubmittal. C. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. D. Provide space for Engineer's submittal stamp. 3.3 SUBMITTAL REVIEW A. Only submittals stamped by the Contractor shall be forwarded to the Engineer. When the Contractor determines that submittals do not meet contract requirements, they should be returned to the originator for correction or modification as appropriate. B. The purpose of the Engineer's review is to check submittals for conformance with the information and design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. C. Upon review by the Engineer, the submittal shall be stamped with the status of the review as: 1. No exception taken 2. Rejected 3. Returned without review 4. See notations 5. Revise and Resubmit 6. Submit Specified Item. D. Submittals which require no action or are not subject to review will not be returned. END OF SECTION - , rpj CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 01 3300-3 E Pik PM k rrr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 014000 — QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance submittals. B. Control of installation. C. Tolerances. D. Testing and inspection service. E. Manufacturers' field services. IC01 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 3000 — Administrative Requirements: Processing Submittals. B. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 329 — Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and /or Testing; 2005b. B. ASTM E 543 — Standard Practice for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2004. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit 2 copies of report to Engineer and to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project Title and number. C. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Engineer, provide interpretation of results. 2. Test reports are submitted for Engineer's knowledge as contact administrator or for the City of Iowa City, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 B. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and contractor or installation /application subcontractor to Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate Material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Engineer. C. Manufacturers' Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, startup, adjusting, and finishing, for the City of Iowa City's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for City of Iowa City. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES. A. Contractor Employed Agency: 1. Testing Agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 543, ASTM C 1021, ASTM C 1077, and ASTM C 1093. 2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329. 3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in Iowa. 4. Testing equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST _established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality assurance program. PART 2 - ;PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualifies to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-2 6w y Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized of withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. E. Retesting required because of nonconformance to specified requirements shall be performed by ,... the same agency on instructions by the Engineer. Payment for retesting will be charged to the contractor by deducting testing charges from the contract price. •- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-3 B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual section for testing required. ` B. Testing agency duties: E: , 1. Provide qualified personnel at the site. Cooperate with the Engineer and C46t6ctor ins•; performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with Specified standard. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. ,.. 4. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non - conformance of Work or products. kw 5. Submit reports of all tests /inspections specified. C. Limits on testing /inspection Agency Authority: 1r, 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of the Contract Documents. �.•• 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of the Contractor. AW 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. "ft D. Contractor Responsibilities: 6W 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested or inspected. IPA b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested /inspected. C. To facilitate tests /inspections. „■ d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Engineer and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing /inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional """ samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E. Retesting required because of nonconformance to specified requirements shall be performed by ,... the same agency on instructions by the Engineer. Payment for retesting will be charged to the contractor by deducting testing charges from the contract price. •- QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project ICON 3.4 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace work or portions of the work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace work, Engineer with direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-4 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 015000 —TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS iw PART 1 - GENERAL 'f 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES j A. Temporary utilities. `= �. B. Temporary telephone service. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. iW E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. B. Existing facilities may not be used. Irr C. New permanent facilities may not be used. i 1.03 TELEPHONE SERVICE `r A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. on 1.04 BARRIERS irr A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities from damage from construction operations and demolition. im B. Protect stored materials, site and structures from damage. r 1.05 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceiling as required to separate work areas from City of Iowa City- occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into City of Iowa City- occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. �r TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ""' 015000 -1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 C. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersection with existing surfaces. 1.06 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and City of iowa City's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with City of Iowa City's security program. 1.07 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and City of Iowa City. C. Provide off -site parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. 1.08 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site daily. C. Open free -fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed shutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.09 REMOVAL OF UTILITES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore new permanent faciltities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION — NOT USED END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 -2 t TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 -2 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS IC01 PART 1 - GENERAL ,C 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements ` B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. " D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 002113 — Instruction to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to bid date B. Section 00 2613 — Substitution Request Form: Must accompany all requests. C. Section 01 4000 — Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 7 days after date of Notice to Proceed. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturer's standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for the Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Sample submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. E. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 -1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. 2.2 A. B. C. NEW PRODUCTS w I C01 Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. PRODUCT OPTIONS Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. Products Specified by Name One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.3 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A.' Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. 'Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 -EXECUTION L: 3.1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instruction to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Substitution Request Form (00 2613) must accompany all requests. D. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitutions with Contract Documents. E. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submiter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate instillation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to the City of Iowa City. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 -2 pa I lw Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 5. Will reimburse City of Iowa City and Engineer for review or redesign services associated with acceptance of substitutions and re- approval by authorities. F. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. G. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Engineer with notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.3 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving /storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. Onsite storage is limited, provide offsite storage as required. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an 'environ,3tent favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground; r t F. Provide bonded off -site stoage and protection when site dies not permit on -site storage- :nor protection. G. Cover products subject to deteriation with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 -3 it Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 H. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. I. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods the prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. J. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 -4 C PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 -4 4M m Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 01 7300 — EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL IC01 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal and /or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. C. Cutting and patching. D. Pre - Installation meetings. E. Laying out the work. F. Cleaning and protection. G. Starting of systems and equipment. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 1000 — Summary: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy; work sequence; identification of salvaged and relocated equipment and materials. B. Section 01 5000 — Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary interior partitions and facilities. C. Section 01 7700 — closeout procedures: Closeout procedures related to achieving Substantial Completion and final completion of the Work. D. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See section 01 3000 — Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 -1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS IC01 A. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Iowa. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispensing into atmosphere. C. Noise Control: Provide methods, means and facilities to minimize noise produces by construction operations. D. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. 1.6 COORDINATION A. See section 01 1000 — Summary, for occupancy - related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Coordinate completion and clean -up of work of separate sections. H. After City of Iowa City occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of City of Iowa City's activities. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS ' 017300 -2 E Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. r -' C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substion described in section 01 6000 — Product Requirements. .? PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION `•' A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over - ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Applying manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new materials or substance in contact or bond. 3.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 -3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Engineer four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participatnts, with two copies to Engineer, City of Iowa City, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.4 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Engineer of any discrepancies discovered. C. Contractor shall locate and protect reference points. D: Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: E. = Periodically verify layouts by same means. �. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.5 `-GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent textures on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.6 ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Separate areas in which alterations are being conducted from other areas that are still occupied. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 -4 116 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 5000 in locations indicated on drawings or required to maintain safety and quality control. C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. 1. Where opening in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior enclosure weatherproof. D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. 2. Relocate items indicated on drawings 3. Where new surfaces finishes are to applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish. 4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicate, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications); Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1. Maintain existing active system that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel. 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required. 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are not to be replaced with new services, maintain existing system in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages. b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. F. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finished damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching for new work. G. Adapt existing work to fit new work: 1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Engineer. r ` - -" 2. Where removal of partitions or walls result in adjacent spaces becoming, one, re work colors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breakers, steps, or bulkheads. H. Clean existing systems and equipment. EXECUTION REWIREMENTS 0173b0 -5 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project I C01 I. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off -site, do not burn or bury. J. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. K. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non- conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. B. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surface to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw and core drill. Pneumatic tools are not allowed without prior approval. D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. F. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with code, to full thickness of the penetrated element. G. Refinish surface to match adjacent finish, for continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. H. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts, or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. I. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce I niform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surfaee to nearest intersections. 3.8 'PROGRESS CLEANING A.,; Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash /rubbish from site periodically and dispose off -site; do not burn or bury. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 -6 irr r. Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specifications sections. I C01 C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide Protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffit of opening. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protection with durable sheet materials. F. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plash= covenn if possible. t 3.10 STARTING SYSTEMS cj A. Coordinate schedule for startup of various equipment and systems.' am B. Notify Engineer and owner seven days prior to start up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute startup under supervision and applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to startup, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems to City of Iowa City's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate startup, preparation, control, adjustment, trouble- shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of designated items of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season with six months. 3 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS +*- 017300 -7 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 D. Provide a qualified manufacturer's representative who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel. 3.12 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by City of Iowa City prior to final completion before City of Iowa City occupancy. B. Use cleaning materials that are non hazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view, remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Replace filters of operating equipment. F. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash /rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. = Refer to Section 017700. I R. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1.. Provide copies to Engineer and City of Iowa City. t C. City of Iowa City will occupy all of the building as specified in Section 01 1000 — Summary. 3.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections of one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent of Subcontractor without prior written consent of the City of Iowa City. END OF SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017300 -8 Pon IYr 9 H M Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 01 7700 — CLOSEOUT'PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL r: 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contract closeout procedures related to: 1. Substantial Completion of the Work and 2. Final inspection and Owner's acceptance of the Work. B. Closeout submittals including: 1. Substantial Completion documents. t e 2. Final Application for Payment with supporting documents. 3. Project Record Documents. 4. Warranties and Bonds. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 00 5215 — Agreement with General Conditions: Performance and Payment Bonds, warranty, and correction work. B. Section 01 3000 — Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures for shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Individual product sections: specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual product sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Declaration of Substantial Completion: Submit three copies of required forms and related documentation certifying that status of Work is consistent with "Substantial Completion ". B. Operation and Maintenance manuals: Provide three sets of revised documents in final form for use by Owner's personnel. Submit at least 15 days prior to date of Declaration of Substantial Completion. C. Material and Product Warranties: Submit fully executed manufacturer's warranties within seven days following Date of Substantial Completion except as follows: 1. For equipment and components parts of equipment put into service during construction with OWNER's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance; list date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. 2. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance; list date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. D. Contractor's Statement of Final Completion: Submit two copies of required forms certifying that Work has been fully completed; make submittal within 15 days Date of Substantial Completion. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 -1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 E. Claim for Final Payment: Submit two copies of required final Application for payment forms together with supporting documents. F. Evidence of payments and Release of Liens: Submit two copies of required forms with claim for Final payment. G. Project Record Documents: Submit required Record Documents with claim for Final Payment. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and inspection of the work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly closeout procedure, with provision for accommodating items installed later. B. Final utility Connections: Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements for final connections. 1.5 PRE - SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION MEETING A. Convene 15 calendar days before submitting Declaration of Substantial Completion for purpose of reviewing required closeout procedures with representatives of Owner and Engineer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate completion and ensure clean -up of work separate sections of the Project Manual. B. The Owner intends to occupy the entire project area at Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1; Include operating instruction and maintenance data prepared by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described equipment and systems. 2' Use Operating and Maintenance Manuals as reference for instruction of Owner's personnel. B.- 'Demonstration and Training: - 4:, = Prior to Substantial Completion, perform demonstration and train Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of equipment and systems designated in individual sections of the Project Manual. C. Preliminary Inspection for Substantial Completion: 1. Schedule and conduct preliminary inspection of the Work accompanied by Owner's Project Representative. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 -2 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 a. Determine and identify items to be listed for correction and completion (punch list) on Contractor's Declaration of Substantial Completion. 2. Verify that surface finish materials are properly installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and exposed surfaces are clean and free from damage. 3. Verify final adjustment of operating items, equipment, and system components to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 4. Verify specific operating and performance requirements described in individual specification sections. a. Secure certification by TAB contractor that testing, adjusting and balancing work has been completed, and respective systems are performing in accordance with specified design requirements. b. Replace filters of operating equipment. 5. Verify that utility services are properly connected and of the correct characteristics. 6. Verify inspection and acceptance of the respective portions of the Work by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. (AHJ). 3.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DOCUMENTS A. Contractor's Declaration of Substantial Completion: 1. Provide the necessary assurance that the progress of the Work is consistent with Substantial Completion as defined by the Contract Documents. 2. Upon receipt of the required forms the Engineer will schedule and conduct a Substantial Completion Inspection. B. Certificate of Substantial Completion: upon verification of Contractor's Punchlist, and subsequent determination by Engineer that status of Work is suitable for occupancy by the Owner, the engineer will prepare Certificates of Substantial Completion (AIA Doc G704- 2000). C. Complete and correct representative items of work listed and attached to the Certificate of Substantial completion within 14 days following Date of Substantial Completion. 3.3 FINAL CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS A. Contractor's Statement of final Completion: Certify that the Work is complete and has been inspected and found to be in compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Claim for final Payment: 1. Prepare application for payment on approved forms. - 2. Amount of final payment shall be the Contractor's retainage (5% of the confract_- amount). C. Evidence of payments and Release of Liens: Prepare the following: c s 1. "Contractors Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" (AIA Doc G706) 2. "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens" (AIA Doc G706A). a. Include separate waivers of lien from subcontractors, suppliers, aild othersEfwith lien rights against property of the Owner. 3. Obtain "Consent of Surety to final Payment" (AIA Doc G707). rF F" D. Project Record Documents: 1. Submit one set hard copy set of the following Record Documents; record actual revisions to the Work: a. Drawing b. Specifications CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES r* 017700 -3 it Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 C. Addenda d. Change orders and other modifications to the Contract. e. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Submit one set of project Record Drawings in AutoCAD format on data CD or DVD; record actual revisions to the Work. All modifications are to be noted in AutoCAD format conforming to accepted drafting practice; scanned, hand -drawn revision notes are unacceptable. 3. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by the Owner. 4. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: a. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. b. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. C. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. 5. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark in AutoCAD format each item to record actual construction including: a. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. b. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. C. Field changes of dimension and detail. d. Details not on original Contract Drawings. E. - Material and Product Warranties: 1. Obtain required warranties and executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with OWNER'S permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial Completion is determined. 2. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. 3. Co- execute warranty documents when required. 4. Retain warranties until time specified for submittal. 5. Include photocopies of each operation and maintenance manuals, indicate on Table of Contents. 3.4 FINAL INSPECTION OF THE WORK A. Following submittal of required closeout documents, the Engineer will conduct a Final Inspection of the Work. B. Accompany Owner's Project Representative and Engineer on final inspection of the Work. C. Complete items of work determined and identified during final inspection. 3.5 OWNER'S FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK A. Upon satisfactory completion of the Work, the Engineer will recommend acceptance of the ,completed Work to the Owner and final payment to the Contractor. B... The Owner will notify the Contractor in writing of the effective date of the acceptance of the Work. END aF= SE>rTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 -4 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project >;° . IC01 J .f SECTION 02 4100 — DEMOLITION. tol/y PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of building elements for alterations purposes. ,., B. Abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures. Yr 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS r arr A. Section 01 1000 — Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premesis. ". B. Section 01 1000 — Summary: Sequencing and staging requirements. C. Section 01 5000 — Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. rr D. Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation. E. Section 01 7000 — Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 — Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. w B. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and construction of barricades and fences. ' 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures. j C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface conditions. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations or other pollution. Provide dust collection fan /filter systems in areas of work as requested by the Owner. B. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 7000 — Execution and Closeout Requirements. ** DEMOLITION aw 024100-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCOPE A. B. 3.2 Remove portions of existing building as indicated on the Drawings. Remove other items indicated for salvage, relocation and recycling. GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS IC01 A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access with range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 4. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 5. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without a permit. 6. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operation. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from City of Iowa City. C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. D. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Engineer and City of Iowa City; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. 3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to City of Iowa City. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or takeoffs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to City of Iowa City. DEMOLITION 024100-2 b Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. Remove items indicated on drawings. C. Services (including but not limited to HVAC, plumbing, fire protection, electrical, and telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaces with new services, maintain existing system in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. D. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; providing shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.5 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind -blown debris from public and private lands. t.. c� END OF SECTION i 60 DEMOLITION 024100 -3 e {r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 23 0500 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS IC01 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500-1 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. c= 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Mechanical demolition. 9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 10. Painting and finishing. 11. Concrete bases. 12. Supports and anchorages. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene - propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile- butadiene rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. None required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6 IC01 A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory- applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. B, Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. Cr OoGrdinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access t1Tat- =are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in c° Dhtision 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames." BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500-2 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I C01 A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and dining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME 81.20.1 for factory- threaded pipe and pipe fittings. {` 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed Wow. y, B. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME 816.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch (3.2 -mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Plastic, Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water- flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for general -duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. liw 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500-3 iwr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. C. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith - Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson. 2. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder - joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory- fabricated, union assembly, for 250 -psig (1725 -kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. C. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory- fabricated, companion - flange assembly, for 150- or 300 -psig (1035 - or 2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 1. Manufacturers: -* a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. C. Epco Sales, Inc. - d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500-4 3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 2.6 SLEEVES A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239 -inch (0.6 -mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast -iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. 2.7 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One - Piece, Deep- Pattern Type: Deep- drawn, box - shaped brass with polished chrome - plated finish. C. One - Piece, Floor -Plate Type: Cast -iron floor plate. 2.8 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic- cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post - hardening, volume- adjusting, nonstaining, noncor r ve, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi (34.5 -MPa), 28 -day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION ' A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500-5 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project I C01 4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: T. New Piping: F a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One - piece, deep - pattern type. f } , b. Insulated Piping: One - piece, stamped -steel type with spring clips. C. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One - piece, cast- _: brass type with polished chrome - plated finish. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500-6 e Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project �r 2. Existing Piping: Use the following: LJ IC01 a. Insulated Piping: Split- plate, stamped -steel type with concealed or exposed -rivet hinge and spring clips. b. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split- casting, cast -brass type with rough -brass finish. C. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split- casting, cast -brass type. d. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split- plate, stamped -steel type with set screw or spring clips. e. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split- casting, floor -plate type. M. Sleeves are not required for core - drilled holes. N. Fire - Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, andjoors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for ' roughing -n, / requirements. f z: 3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead - free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 81.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500-7 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3.4 3.5 3.6 PIPING CONNECTIONS IC01 I A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. PAINTING A. Paint all new piping, duct or equipment passing through exposed, finished spaces. B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory- painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES 3 A. ' Desicfp and install all new or modified metal supports for new equipment. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. T C.`_ Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.8 GR60'TING A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500-8 rr �r r. f.r w rr V I�r e� err Ilil rlri irr rr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION IC01 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500-9 �r BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500-9 irw Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 irr r� SECTION 23 0523 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL irr � 1.1 SUMMARY ` A. This Section includes the following general -duty valves: S ? �,. 1. Copper -alloy ball valves. `f 2. Ferrous -alloy butterfly valves. 3. Bronze check valves. 4. Gray -iron swing check valves. PM 5. Bronze globe valves. 6. Cast -iron globe valves. B. See Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and actuators. a C. See Division 23 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. l +, 1.2 SUBMITTALS �.• A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; furnished specialties; and accessories. �r 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME 1316.10 and ASME 616.34 for dimension and design criteria. it C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. i ii •* VALVES 250523-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 2.2 VALVES, GENERAL A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves. B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated. C. Ferrous Valves NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. F. Valve Actuators: 1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter -turn types. 2. Lever Handle: For quarter -turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller, except plug valves. G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves. H. Valve Flanges: ASME 816.1 for cast -iron valves, ASME 816.5 for steel valves, and ASME 616.24 for bronze valves. I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606. 1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME 616.18. a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F (454 deg C) for angle, check, gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F (216 deg C) for ball valves. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME 61.20.1. J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP -45. `t 2.3 '''COPPER -ALLOY BALL VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: 1. One - Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Belimo C. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. DynaQuip Controls. g. Grinnell Corporation. h. Jamesbury, Inc. i. Kitz Corporation of America. j. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc. k. NIBCO INC. I. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. VALVES ' 250523-2 lb 60 Senior'Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 2. Two - Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: a. Belimo b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. DynaOuip Controls. g. Flow -Tek, Inc. h. Grinnell Corporation. i. Hammond Valve. j. Honeywell Braukmann. r k. Jamesbury, Inc. ; I. Jomar International, LTD. M. Kitz Corporation of America. n. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc. E o. Milwaukee Valve Company. `' p. Nexus Valve Specialties. , q. NIBCO INC. - r. R & M Energy Systems (Borger, TX). S. Red -White Valve Corp. t. Richards Industries; Marwin Ball Valves. U. Wafts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Copper -Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP -110. C. One- Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome - plated bronze ball, PTFE or TFE seats, and 400 -psig (2760 -kPa) minimum CWP rating. 2.4 BRONZE CHECK VALVES r A. Available Manufacturers: Yr 1. Type 1, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. „ C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. Red -White Valve Corp. e. Walworth Co. 2. Type 2, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: Irn a. Cincinnati Valve Co. P” b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Walworth Co. 3. Type 1, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. �r VALVES 250523-3 i`r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Red -White Valve Corp. 4. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Kitz Corporation of America. C. Milwaukee Valve Company. 5. Type 3, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Metal Disc: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Cincinnati Valve Co. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. Grinnell Corporation. g. Hammond Valve. h. Kitz Corporation of America. i. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc. j. Milwaukee Valve Company. k. NIBCO INC. I. Powell, Wm. Co. M. Red -White Valve Corp. n. W alworth Co. o. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 6. Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: _—a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. - _ g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. Milwaukee Valve Company. i. NIBCO INC. '= j. Red -White Valve Corp. k. Walworth Co. I. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP -80. 2.5 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Type 1, Bronze Globe Valves with Metal Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. IC01 VALVES 250523-4 is �r d r 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Kitz Corporation of America. h. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. NIBCO INC. k. Powell, Wm. Co. I. Red -White Valve Corp. M. Walworth Co. 2. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. c ' f. Hammond Valve. g. Kitz Corporation of America. h. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. NIBCO INC. `y k. Powell, Wm. Co. I. Red -White Valve Corp. M. Walworth Co. B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP -80, with ferrous -alloy handwheel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves. 2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves. 3. Pump Discharge: Spring - loaded, lift -disc check valves. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Chilled- and Heating- Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: One - piece, 400 -psig (2760 -kPa) CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Ball Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy. 3. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, horizontal or vertical, bronze. 4. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze. 5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron. 6. Globe Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze. VALVES 250523-5 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 7. Globe Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze - mounted cast iron. D. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Solder -joint or threaded ends, except provide valves with threaded ends for heating hot water services. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends. 3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged or threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Dual -Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A„ Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint cpn! truction. r , 6 --Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts a� herding to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. CC: -Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water- flushable, lead -free flux; ASTM B 32, lead- free -alloy 'solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. END OF SECTION VALVES 250523-6 �r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 e� PP% SECTION 23 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. irr 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal- hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment supports. B. See Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports. it 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP -90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. �. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. Yr 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE w A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. PART2- PRODUCTS f* 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. n it HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS I= A. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory- fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen -Power Pipe Supports. 3. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 5. Empire Industries, Inc. 6. ERICO /Michigan Hanger Co. 7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 8. Grinnell Corp. 9. GS Metals Corp. 10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 12. PHS Industries, Inc. 13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 14. Tolco Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP -69, Type 59, shop- or field- fabricated pipe- support assembly made from structural -steel shapes with MSS SP -58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U- bolts. 2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Description: MFMA -3, shop- or field- fabricated pipe - support assembly made of steel channels and other components. -B. Available Manufacturers: 1 4, ; B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. ERICO /Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. ..= GS Metals Corp. .A`::. Power -Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 5 Thomas & Betts Corporation. 6. "_ Tolco Inc. 7._. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529-2 it Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 3 a. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. 2.5 THERMAL - HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100 -psig- (690 -kPa -) minimum, compressive- strength insulation insert encaed in , e. MKT Fastening, LLC. sheet metal shield. Lr �f B. Available Manufacturers: " 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO /Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation - Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water - repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier. D. Insulation - Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water - repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass. OPM a E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. r* F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches ( 50 mm ) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below _ ambient air temperature. 2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder - Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. C. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fasteners. B. Mechanical- Expansion Anchors: Insert- wedge -type zinc - coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: ,... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 6 230529-3 a. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. C. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset /Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. ,... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 6 230529-3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field- fabricated equipment support made from structural -steel shapes. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and - packaged, dry, hydraulic- cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi (34.5 -MPa), 28 -day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field - applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal- Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750). 2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy - Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation. 4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200). 5. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 6. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529-4 am Oft IN Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 G. Vertical- Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500). 2. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps. H. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations. I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top -Beam C- Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar -joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C- Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspenog frorrri,- ove by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: ? _ a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg). f b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg). C. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg). 8. Side -Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam T.equirea J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe- Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal- Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1- 1/4 inches (32 mm). 2. Spring- Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. it OM bw HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529-5 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 3. Variable- Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. L. Comply with MSS SP -69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Comply with MFMA -102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Use powder- actuated fasteners or mechanical- expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field- fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field - assembled metal framing systems. D. `V The"at- Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. _ E. = Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder- actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder- actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder- actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. __Install mechanical- expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded - structural -steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529-6 60 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project I C01 J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME 831.1 (for power piping) and ASME 831.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through i" insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal- hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. 60 C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME 631.1 for power piping and ASME 631.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: .. a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 -1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. C. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. 5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal- Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.:` '. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS c. A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or_to,_support; equipment above floor. ** B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface;-, C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. P• 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. P= B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. it HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529-7 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field - painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing- repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION I I j 1 i I i i i i { HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 230529-8 % Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL I C01 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation: 1. Equipment nameplates. 2. Access panel and door markers. 3. Pipe markers. 4. Duct markers. 5. Valve tags. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment. 1. Data: a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. ` b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. C. Labels of tested compliances. `- _ t- 2. Location: Accessible and visible. 3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment. - -' B. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16 -inch- (1.6 -mm -) thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8 -inch (3.2 -mm) center hole for attachment. 1. Fasteners: Self- tapping, stainless -steel screws or contact -type, permanent adhesive. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES �W A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color- coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow. 1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project M L L IC01 2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each ' application length. 3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full -band pipe ' markers extending 360 deg rees around pipe at each location. 4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full -band or strip -type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label. ' 5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of , pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of ■ pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor i barrier. Self- Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure- sensitive, permanent -type, self- adhesive back. E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick with pressure - sensitive, permanent -type, self- adhesive back. 1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum. 2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) or Larger: 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum. 2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color -coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact -type, permanent adhesive. 2.4 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) numbers, with numbering scheme. Provide 5/32 -inch (4 -mm) hole for fastener. 1. Material: 0.032 -inch- (0.8 -mm -) thick aluminum. 2. Valve -Tag Fasteners: Brass wire -link or beaded chain; or S -hook. PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than ` �s+ngle -type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's _optron. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553-2 FM Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION IC01 A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment: NQ 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Fuel- burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor - driven units. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and equipment. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. Packaged HVAC central- station and zone -type units. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels 3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION similar � e A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow. 1 • Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm ) Self-adhesive markers. Use color- coded, self- adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, lapped at least 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe. 2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Self- adhesive pipe markers. Use color- coded, self- adhesive plastic tape, at least 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) wide, lapped at least 3 inches (75 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe. B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine ow • rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations as follows: we 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. 110 Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6• Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 i feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. irr 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers. RM it 3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION err A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: IN 1 Green: For cold -air supply ducts. 2. Blue: For exhaust -, outside -, relief -, return -, and mixed -air ducts. om MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION i1" 230553-3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project B. 3.5 A. B. IC01 3• Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 112 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches 1830 and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths the size of principal lettering. ( mm), Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. a s VALVE -TAG INSTALLATION Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory- fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing -in connections of end -use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. Valve -Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme an d with captions similar to those indicated in the following: 1 • Valve -Tag Size and Shape: a• Cold Water: 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm), round. b• Hot Water: 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm), round. C. Gas: 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm), round. 2• Valve -Tag Color: a• Cold Water: Blue. b• Hot Water: Red. C. Gas: Yellow. 3• Letter Color: a• Cold Water: White. b. Hot Water: White. C. Gas: Black. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have be other work. come visually blocked by B. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ' 230553-4 w w Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 1. Air Systems: a. Constant - volume air systems. b. Variable- air - volume systems. J 2. Hydronic Piping Systems: a a. Constant -flow systems. b. Variable -flow systems. 3. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 4. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper. B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities. C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants. D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. E. NC: Noise criteria. F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. G. RC: Room criteria. H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project ICol I I. Smoke - Control System: An engineered system that uses fans to produce airflow and pressure ' differences across barriers to limit smoke movement. J. Smoke - Control Zone: A space within a building that is enclosed by smoke barriers and is a part , of a zoned smoke - control system. K. Stair Pressurization System: A type of smoke - control system that is intended to positively pressurize stair towers with outdoor air by using fans to keep smoke from contaminating the stair towers during an alarm condition. L. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. M. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. N. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. O. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. P. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. Q. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the ' distribution system. R. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment. S. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm. C. Warranties specified in this Section. CA-) QUALITY ASSURANCE -A: TikB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB. B: Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-2 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems. E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. 1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of factory- authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities. B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. 1.8 WARRANTY A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) g PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to disc_ over conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-3 it Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 I 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine Project Record Documents. D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - -Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine system and equipment test reports. H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. K. Examine terminal units, such as variable- air - volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. L. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. M. Examine three -way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. N - _Examine heat - transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. G: examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-4 !!I L� it In LI r�r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. Q. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: R. 3.2 A. B. 3.3 E 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable- air - volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two -way valves and three -way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. PREPARATION Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step -by -step procedures. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify.-the following: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 91 Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. Automatic temperature - control systems are operational. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.:' Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air - pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING j 230593-5 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 1 C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper - control positions, valve position indicators, fan- speed- control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" duct layouts. C. For variable- air - volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements E. Check airflow patterns from the outside -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air dampers, through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air - handling unit components. L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT - VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1 Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: _ a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and — upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. - _ 1 b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. _ - C. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as _ possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air - handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air - handling and - treating equipment. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-6 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan -speed changes. 6. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan - motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. Measure terminal outlets using a direct - reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors .,and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified toleranc®s�of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the;, Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE - AIR - VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set -point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure - Independent, Variable- Air - Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable- air - volume systems as follows: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-7 rr .t6 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3.7 I IC01 1. Set outside -air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust -air dampers at a position that simulates full - cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply -fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal -unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal -unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal -unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant - volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant - volume air systems. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return -air ducts and inlets as described for constant - volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static - pressure controller at the main supply -air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record the final fan performance data. GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch - circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup- water - station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow - control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential - pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive - displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. `;7. Check pump -motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow - balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8: Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. -y fl L� r 1 I TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-8 ' 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project pa l w 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS IC01 A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive - displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head - capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. 3. Verify pump -motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design. B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow - pressure -drop relationship may be used as a flow- indicating device. D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor -air temperature. G. Measure the differential - pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing. U 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three -way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat - exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY - SECONDARY -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary systerh:` Y j- _ 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-9 rr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS IC01 A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal - protection - element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable- Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data. 3.12 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions: 1. Evaporator -water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 2. If water - cooled chillers, condenser -water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments furnished by chiller manufacturer. 4. Power factor if factory- installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt. 5. Kilowatt input if factory- installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt. 6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. 7. If air - cooled chillers, verify condenser -fan rotation and record fan and motor data including number of fans and entering- and leaving -air temperatures. 313 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS k. _44-hydronic, measure entering- and leaving -water temperatures and water flow. ;team, measure entering -water temperature and flow and leaving steam pressure, - — tena�serature, and flow. 3.14 ; - => PROCEDURES FOR HEAT - TRANSFER COILS A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Entering- and leaving -water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. F, 11 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-10 ' iWr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 i 6. Airflow. .� 7. Air pressure drop. 3.15 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature - control system. B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight -hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C. Measure outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. 3.16 TEMPERATURE - CONTROL VERIFICATION A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low- temperature controllers). E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Check main control supply -air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations. J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail -safe operats, 3.17 TOLERANCES,, A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plug 10 per Pnt. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling -Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-11 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3.18 REPORTING I IC01 A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.19 A. B. C. I -,•3 FINAL REPORT General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter - quality font, on standard bond paper, in three -ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. ,8.f Report date. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. Summary of contents including the following: '.a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. t. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-12 it u iJ I 1 n Ll it Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project E. F. i IC01 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outside -, return -, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable- air - volume systems. g. Settings for supply -air, static - pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. Air - Handling Unit Test Reports: For air - handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. J r b. Location. C. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. r•? e. Manufacturer's serial number. l f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center, and amount of adjustments in inches -(mm). j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size. 2. Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. C. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm (Us). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). C. Fan rpm. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-13 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Filter static - pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). f. Preheat coil static - pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). g. Cooling coil static - pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). h. Heating coil static - pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). i. Outside airflow in cfm (Us). j. Return airflow in cfm (Us). k. Outside -air damper position. I. Return -air damper position. M. Vortex damper position. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports: 1. Coil Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m). h. Tube size in NPS (DN). i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): = a. b. c. d. e. -f. i. 1• k. I. m n. o. Airflow rate in cfm (Us). Average face velocity in fpm (m /s). Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa). Outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). Return -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). Leaving -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). Water flow rate in gpm (Us). Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). Entering -water temperature in deg F (deg C). Leaving -water temperature in deg F (deg C). Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa). Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C). Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa). Gas- and Oil -Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btuh (kW). TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 0 A Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 2. IC01 h. Ignition type. i. Burner - control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. I. Motor full -load amperage and service factor. M. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. n. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm (Us). b. Entering -air temperature in deg F (deg C). C. Leaving -air temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Air temperature differential in deg F (deg C). e. Entering -air static pressure in inches wg (Pa). f. Leaving -air static pressure in inches wg (Pa). g. Air static - pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). h. Low -fire fuel input in Btuh (kW). i. High -fire fuel input in Btuh (kW). j. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa). k. High- temperature -limit setting in deg F (deg C). I. Operating set point in Btuh (kW). M. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh (kW). Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 14 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. '. C. Make and type. - d. Model number and size. - e. Manufacturer's serial number. < f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). 2. Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. C. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). g. Number of belts, make, and size. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm (Us). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). C. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-15 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 I e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa). J. Round, Flat -Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross - section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air - handling unit number. b. Location and zone. C. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Duct size in inches (mm). f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m). g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm (Us). h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m /s). i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (Us). j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m /s). k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa). K. Air - Terminal- Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air - handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. C. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air - terminal- device make. f. Air - terminal- device number from system diagram. g. Air - terminal- device type and model number. h. Air - terminal- device size. i. Air - terminal- device effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m). 2'-, Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airf low rate in cfm (Us). b. Air velocity in fpm (m /s). C. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (Us). d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m /s). Final airf low rate in cfm (Us). i. Final velocity in fpm (m /s). - g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C). L. System -Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air - handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. C. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-16 �w. e r* iW Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project a. Airflow rate in cfm (Us). b. Entering -water temperature in deg F (deg C). C. Leaving -water temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa). e. Entering -air temperature in deg F (deg C). f. Leaving -air temperature in deg F (deg C). M. Packaged Chiller Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Make and model number. C. Manufacturer's serial number. d. Refrigerant type and capacity in gal. (L). e. Starter type and size. f. Starter thermal protection size. g. Compressor make and model number. h. Compressor manufacturer's serial number. 2. Air - Cooled Condenser Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): IC01 a. Refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa). b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F (deg C). C. Entering- and leaving -air temperature in deg F (deg C). 3. Evaporator Test Reports (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa). -- b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F (deg C). C. Entering -water temperature in deg F (deg C). t d. Leaving -water temperature in deg F (deg C). _ e. Entering -water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). 4. Compressor Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Suction pressure in psig (kPa). b. Suction temperature in deg F (deg C). C. Discharge pressure in psig (kPa). d. Discharge temperature in deg F (deg C). e. Oil pressure in psig (kPa). f. Oil temperature in deg F (deg C). g. Voltage at each connection. h. Amperage for each phase. i. Kilowatt input. j. Crankcase heater kilowatt. k. Chilled -water control set point in deg F (deg C). I. Condenser -water control set point in deg F (deg C). M. Refrigerant low- pressure- cutoff set point in psig (kPa). n. Refrigerant high - pressure- cutoff set point in psig (kPa). 5. Refrigerant Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Oil level. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-17 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project I IC01 b. Refrigerant level. ' C. Relief valve setting in psig (kPa). d. Unloader set points in psig (kPa). ' e. Percentage of cylinders unloaded. f. Bearing temperatures in deg F (deg C). g. Vane position. ' h. Low - temperature- cutoff set point in deg F (deg C). N. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. C. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Water flow rate in gpm (Us). g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm). k. Motor make and frame size. I. Motor horsepower and rpm. M. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full -load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type. - 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa). b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). _., C. Actual impeller size in inches (mm). d. Full -open flow rate in gpm (Us). e. Full -open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). = f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). -:g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Final water flow rate in gpm (Us). j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. O. Boiler Test Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. C. Service. d. Make and type. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Fuel type and input in Btuh (kW). g. Number of passes. h. Ignition type. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-18 IPA irrtr ire 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 i. Burner - control types. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Operating pressure in psig (Wa). b. Operating temperature in deg F (deg C). C. Entering -water temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Leaving -water temperature in deg F (deg C). e. Number of safety valves and sizes in NPS (DN). f. Safety valve settings in psig (kPa). g. High -limit setting in psig (kPa). h. Operating - control setting. i. High -fire set point. j. Low -fire set point. k. Voltage at each connection. I. Amperage for each phase. M. Draft fan voltage at each connection. n. Draft fan amperage for each phase. o. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa). P. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: -- a. r Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. C. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.20 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report. 2. Randomly check the following for each system: a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. C. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations. e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report. B. Final Inspection: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-19 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project I IC01 1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Engineer. 2. Engineer shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8 -hour business day. 3. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 4. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. 5. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report. 6. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment. 3.21 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near -peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-20 n ii 1 ii 1 u liar Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 23 0713 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, insulating cements, field - applied jackets, AND accessories and attachments. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Shop fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Removable insulation sections at access panels. 2. Application of field - applied jackets. 3. Applications at linkages for control devices. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide products with flame- spread and smoke - developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency_ acceptat4le to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offi€ring products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. C. Owens - Corning Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all- service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. LO B. Field - Applied Jackets: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. ,,... DUCT INSULATION 230713-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 1. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, lass- fiber - reinforced, flame- retardant kraft paper and , 9 PP aluminum foil. C. Accessories and Attachments: 1. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL- C- 20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass -fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz. /sq. yd. (270 g /sq. m). 2. Bands: Aluminum 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide. 3. Wire: 0.080 -inch (2.0 -mm), nickel- copper alloy; 0.062 -inch (1.6 -mm), soft - annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062 -inch (1.6 -mm), soft - annealed, galvanized steel. 4. Weld- Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper- coated steel pin for capacitor - discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. a. Adhesive - Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. PART - EXECUTION 31 ..' GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. adversely affect insulation application. 1 u Remove materials that will I B. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Seal joints and seams with vapor- retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. E. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. F. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. G. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor- retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. H. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor- retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. DUCT INSULATION 230713-2 1 h Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 J. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire -rated walls and partitions. K. Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire /smoke damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. L. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor. 3.2 DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Service: Supply -air, return -air, and outside -air ducts, concealed. 1. Material: Mineral -fiber blanket. 2. Thickness: 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm). 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field - Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. END OF SECTION DUCT INSULATION 230713-3 .w Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 23 0719 - PIPE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY IC01 A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible piping insulation, insulating cements, field - applied jackets, accessories and attachments, and sealing compounds. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide products with flame- spread and smoke - developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering "^ products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ba 1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. C. Owens - Corning Fiberglas Corp. - "' d. Schuller International, Inc. - 2.2 PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS <' A. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying %oh the following: 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory- applied, all - purpose, vapor- retarder jacket. 2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing. 3. Fire - Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A -3316C Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass -fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass -fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass -fiber insulation. 4. Vapor- Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water - resistant, vapor- retarder mastic for indoor applications. Comply with MIL- C- 19565C, Type II. 5. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. 6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196. PIPE INSULATION 23 0719- 1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 7. Mineral- Fiber, Hydraulic- Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. B. Field- Applied Jackets: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass- fiber - reinforced, flame- retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. 2. PVC Jacket: High- impact, ultraviolet- resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. 3. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory- fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20- mil- (0.5 -mm -) thick, high- impact, ultraviolet- resistant PVC. C. Accessories and Attachments: 1. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL- C- 20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass -fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz. /sq. yd. (270 g /sq. m). 2. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide aluminum. 3. Wire: 0.080 -inch (2.0 -mm), nickel- copper alloy; 0.062 -inch (1.6 -mm), soft - annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062 -inch (1.6 -mm), soft - annealed, galvanized steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 -' GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B.e Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Seal joints and seams with vapor- retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. E. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. F. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. G. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor- retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. H. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor- retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. PIPE INSULATION 23 0719- 2 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 I. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. J. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing. K. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire -rated walls and partitions. L. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Service: Heating hot- and chilled- water supply and return. 1. Operating Temperature: 100 to 200 deg F (38 to 93 deg C). 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Field- Applied Jacket: Foil and paper inside building, PVC on roof. 4. Vapor Retarder Required: For chilled water piping. END OF SECTION PIPE INSULATION 23 0719- 3 Yr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project ICo1 IN SECTION 23 09 23- HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions, and Division 01 - General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. Subcontractor must familiarize himself with the terms of the above documents. oft HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-1 it 1.2 Qualifications of Bidder A. All bidders must be building automation contractors in the business of installing direct digital control building automation systems for a minimum of 5 years. B. All bidders must have a service and installation office within 150 miles of Iowa City. it C. All bidders must be authorized distributors or branch offices of the manufacturers specified. ,. D. All bidders must have a trained staff of application engineers, who have been certified by the manufacturer in the configuration, programming and service of the automation system. r E. The following bidders have been pre - qualified: 1. Johnson Controls (Facility Explorer "Niagara" Series) fps 2. Siebe 3. Staefa 4. Honeywell 6W .. . Pft 1.3 Scope of Work i" A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete building automation i system including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications =software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation as called. for in this bw specification. All components of the system — workstations,- 'application controllers, unitary controllers, etc. shall communicate using the BACnet protocol, ,�. as defined by ASHRAE Standard 135 -2001. No gateways shall be used for communication to controllers furnished under this section. At a minimum, provide controls for the following: ,�. 1. Air handling units 2. Variable volume box control 3. Convection heater controls 4. Chiller controls interface 5. Pump controls 6. Boiler controls interface B. Except as otherwise noted, the control system shall consist of all Ethernet Network Controllers, Standalone Digital Control Units, workstations, software, sensors, transducers, relays, valves, dampers, damper operators, control panels, it oft HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-1 it ' Ic 1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project o ' and other accessory equipment, along with a complete system of electrical interlocking wiring to fill the intent of the specification and provide for a complete and operable system. Except as otherwise specified, provide operators for equipment such as dampers if the equipment manufacturer does not provide these. Coordinate requirements with the various Contractors. C. The BAS contractor shall review and study all HVAC drawings and the entire specification to familiarize him with the equipment and system operation and to verify the quantities and types of dampers, operators, alarms, etc. to be provided. D. All interlocking, wiring and installation of control devices associated with the equipment listed below shall be provided under this Contract. When the BAS System is fully installed and operational, the BAS Contractor and representatives of the Owner will review and check out the system. At that time, the BAS contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system and prove that it complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications. E. Provide services and manpower necessary for commissioning of system in coordination with the HVAC Contractor, Balancing Contractor and Owner's , representative. F. All work performed under this section of the specifications will comply with all codes, laws and governing bodies. If the drawings and /or specifications are in conflict with governing codes, the Contractor shall submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code restrictions. If this specification and associated drawings exceed governing code requirements, the ' specification will govern. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary construction permits and licenses. 1:4 Training i4. Provide a minimum of (40) hours of on -site training for (3) system operators. The training will be hands -on type at the owner's office. The training class will use - the actual Operator's Manual that will be submitted for this project. Training to be , conducted in multiple sessions over a period of sixty days after substantial completion and system acceptance by the Owner and shall be on a schedule acceptable to the Owner. Drive time for the trainer to and from the project ' location shall not count against the training time. Any time the Owner's maintenance staff observes the construction or programming process shall not be counted against the training budget unless that work is only for the benefit of training the Owner's operators. ' 1.5 System Description A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be designed in strict accordance with ASHRAE's BACnet standard, 135 -2001, to provide interoperability between different building subsystems. The system shall also provide a graphical, web- based operator interface that allows for instant access to any system through a ' standard browser. B. The system shall use BACnet or Niagara R3 /AX network types and protocols exclusively. Non - BACnet- or non - Niagara R3 /AX -based systems are not acceptable. The contractor must provide PC -based programming workstations, operator workstations and microcomputer controllers of modular design providing distributed processing capability, and allowing future expansion of both ' input/output points and processing /control functions. Contractor must provide manufacturer's Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for workstation software and every controller model that are installed. , HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-2 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project Ira C. For this project the system shall consist of the following components: "^ D. Administration and Programming Workstation(s). The BAS Contractor shall furnish 1 Administration and Programming Workstation Computers and 1 printer as described in Part 2 of the specification. These workstations must be running the standard workstation software developed and tested by the manufacturer of the network controllers and the standalone controllers. No third party front -end workstation software will be acceptable. Workstations must conform to the B -OWS BACnet device profile. E. Web -Based Operator Workstations The BAS Contractor shall furnish licenses for 1 concurrent user to the BAS system. Web -based users shall have access to all system points and graphics, shall be able to receive and acknowledge alarms, and shall be able to control setpoints and other parameters. The web -based interface must conform to the B -OWS BACnet device profile. F. Ethernet -based Network Router and /or Controller(s). The BAS Contractor shall furnish 1 Ethernet -based network controllers as described in Part 2 of the specification. These controllers will connect directly to the Operator Workstation over Ethernet, using the BACnet/IP protocol at a minimum of 100mbps, and provide communication to the Standalone Digital Control Units and /or other Input/Output Modules. Network Controllers shall conform to BACnet device profile B -BC. Network controllers that utilize RS232 serial communications or ARCNET to communicatee with the workstations will not be accepted. Network Controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Building Controllers (B -BC). G. Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs). 1. Provide the necessary quantity and types of SDCUs to meet the requirements of the project for mechanical equipment control including air handlers, central plant control, and terminal unit control. Each SDCU will operate completely standalone, containing all of the 1/0 and programs to control its associated equipment. Each SDCU shall conform to the BACnet *" device profile B -AAC. +� 2. SDCUs shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B -AAC). 1.6 Work by Others IC01 om HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923 -3 i6w A. The BAS Contractor shall cooperate with other contractors performing work on �.. this project necessary to achieve a complete and neat installation. To that end, it each contractor shall consult the drawings and specifications for all trades to determine the nature and extent of others' work. - B. The BAS Contractor shall furnish all control valves, sensor wells, flow meters and-. iWr other similar equipment for installation by the Mechanical Contractor. - - C. The BAS Contractor shall provide field supervision to the designated eontractor for the installation of the following: 1. Automatic control dampers 2. Fire /smoke dampers om HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923 -3 i6w E. Submit five (5) copies of submittal data and shop drawings to the Engineer for review prior to ordering or fabrication of the equipment. The Contractor prior to ' submitting shall check all documents for accuracy. Include, as part of the submittal, a proposed training schedule for the Owner's operators to occur after substantial completion. F. The Engineer will make corrections, if required, and return to the Contractor. The Contractor will then resubmit with the corrected or additional data. This procedure shall be repeated until all corrections are made to the satisfaction of , the Engineer and the submittals are fully approved. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-4 ' ' Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 ' 3. Blank -off plates for dampers that are smaller than duct size. D. 4. Sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification. ' The Electrical Contractor shall provide: 1. All power wiring to motors, heat trace, junction boxes for power to BAS panels. ' 2. BAS Contractor to hardwire to fan shut down for duct smoke detectors. 1.7 Code Compliance A. Provide BAS components and ancillary equipment, which are UL -916 listed and B. labeled. All equipment or piping used in conditioned air streams, spaces or return air ' plenums shall comply with NFPA 90A Flame /Smoke /Fuel contribution rating of C. 25/50/0 and all applicable building codes or requirements. All to the National Electrical Code. wiring shall conform D. All smoke dampers shall be rated in accordance with UL 555S. E. Comply with FCC rules, Part 15 regarding Class A radiation for computing devices and low power communication equipment operating in commercial environments. F. Comply with FCC, Part 68 rules for telephone modems and data sets. , 1.8 Submittals A. All shop drawings shall be prepared in AutoCAD software. In addition to the ' drawings, the Contractor shall furnish a CD containing the identical information. Drawings shall be B size or larger. B. Shop drawings shall include a riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers ' and workstations, with associated network wiring. Also included shall be individual schematics of each mechanical system showing all connected points l with reference to their associated controller. Typicals will be allowed where ' appropriate. C. Submittal data shall contain manufacturer's data on all hardware and software products required by the specification. Valve, damper and air flow station ' schedules shall indicate size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment. D. Software submittals shall contain narrative descriptions of sequences of operation, program listings, point lists, and a complete description of the graphics, reports, alarms and configuration to be furnished with the workstation software. Information shall be bound or in a three ring binder with an index and tabs. , E. Submit five (5) copies of submittal data and shop drawings to the Engineer for review prior to ordering or fabrication of the equipment. The Contractor prior to ' submitting shall check all documents for accuracy. Include, as part of the submittal, a proposed training schedule for the Owner's operators to occur after substantial completion. F. The Engineer will make corrections, if required, and return to the Contractor. The Contractor will then resubmit with the corrected or additional data. This procedure shall be repeated until all corrections are made to the satisfaction of , the Engineer and the submittals are fully approved. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-4 ' r 0 PM iiw iko Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 1.9 System Startup & Commissioning A. Each point in the system shall be tested for both hardware and software functionality. In addition, each mechanical and electrical system under control of the BAS will be tested against the appropriate sequence of operation specified herein. Successful completion of the system test shall constitute the beginning of the warranty period. A written report will be submitted to the owner indicating that the installed system functions in accordance with the plans and specifications. B. The BAS contractor shall commission and set in operating condition all major equipment and systems, such as the chilled water, hot water and all air handling systems, in the presence of the equipment manufacturer's representatives, as applicable, and the Owner and Architect's representatives. C. The BAS Contractor shall provide all manpower and engineering services required to assist the HVAC Contractor and Balancing Contractor in testing, adjusting, and balancing all systems in the building. The BAS Contractor shall have a trained technician available on request during the balancing of the systems. The BAS Contractor shall coordinate all requirements to provide a complete air balance with the Balancing Contractor and shall include all labor and materials in his contract. 1.10 Training The BAS Contractor shall provide both on -site training to the Owner's representative and maintenance personnel per the following description: A. On -site training shall consist of a minimum of 40 hours of hands -on instruction geared at the operation and maintenance of the systems. The curriculum shall include 1. System Overview 2. System Software and Operation a. System access b. Software features overview C. Changing setpoints and other attributes d. Scheduling e. Editing programmed variables f. Displaying color graphics g. Running reports h. Workstation maintenance i. Application programming HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923 -5 A. The BAS contractor shall warrant the system for 24 months after system acceptance and beneficial use by the owner. During the warranty period, the BAS contractor shall be responsible for all necessary revisions to the software as required to provide a complete and workable system consistent with the letter , and intent of the Sequence of Operation section of the specification. The contractor shall return to the project location up to 8 times as requested by the Owner to provide and verify Warranty service. B. Updates to the manufacturer's software shall be provided at no charge during the ' warranty period. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 A. General ' 3. Operational sequences including start-up, shutdown, adjusting and balancing. 4. Equipment maintenance. ' 1.11 Operating and Maintenance Manuals A. The operation and maintenance manuals shall contain all information necessary for the operation, maintenance, replacement, installation, and parts procurement for the entire BAS. This documentation shall include specific part numbers and software versions and dates. A complete list of recommended spare parts shall ' be included with the leadtime and expected frequency of use of each part clearly ' identified. B. Following project completion and testing, the BAS contractor will submit as -built drawings reflecting the exact installation of the system. The as -built documentation shall also include a copy of all application software both in written form and on diskette. ' 1.12 Warranty A. The BAS contractor shall warrant the system for 24 months after system acceptance and beneficial use by the owner. During the warranty period, the BAS contractor shall be responsible for all necessary revisions to the software as required to provide a complete and workable system consistent with the letter , and intent of the Sequence of Operation section of the specification. The contractor shall return to the project location up to 8 times as requested by the Owner to provide and verify Warranty service. B. Updates to the manufacturer's software shall be provided at no charge during the ' warranty period. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 System Architecture A. General ' 1. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall consist of Network Router /Controllers (NRCs), a family of Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs), Administration and Programming Workstations (APWs), Web ' based Operator Workstations (WOWs), and one File Server to support - system configurations where more than three operator workstations are - required. The BAS shall provide control, alarm detection, scheduling, reporting and information management for the entire facility, and Wide ' Area Network (WAN) if applicable, from a single ODBC- compliant _ - database. - 2. The system shall be designed with a top -level 10 /100bT Ethernet network, using the BACnet/IP protocol. A sub - network using the BACnet MS/TP protocol, with a minimum of 76.8kb speed, shall connect the local, stand- alone controllers with Ethernet -level controller /routers. The use of ' ARCNET, LONworks, RS -232 serial communications, or BACnet Ethernet for these controllers is prohibited. B. Level 1 Network Description ' 1. Level 1, the main backbone of the system, shall be an Ethernet 10 /100bT LAN/WAN, using BACnet/IP as the communications protocol. Network Router /Controllers, Operator Workstations, and the Central File Server ' HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923 -6 ' 1. All NRCs, Workstation(s) and File Server shall be capable of residing directly on the owner's Ethernet TCP /IP LAN/WAN with no required PM gateways. Furthermore, the NBC's, Workstation(s) and File Server shall be capable of using standard, commercially available, off - the -shelf Ethernet infrastructure components such as routers, switches and hubs. With this design the owner may utilize the investment of an existing or new, enterprise network or structured cabling system. This also allows the option of the maintenance of the LAN/WAN to be performed by the owner's Information Systems Department as all devices utilize standard TCP /IP components. F. System Expansion 1. The BAS system shall be scalable and expandable at all levels of the- """ system using the same software interface, and the same Level 1 and ir. Level 2 controllers. Systems that require replacement of - either the: workstation software or field controllers in order to expand the system shalt PM not be acceptable. 2. Additional web -based operator licenses shall added in the field through an upgrade of the web server's security key, with no re- programming required. 3. The system shall use the same application programming language for all levels: Operator Workstation, Network Router /Controller, and Standalone Digital Control Unit. Furthermore, this single programming language shall be used for all applications: environmental control, and digital data communication interfaces to third party microprocessor -based devices. G. Support For Open Systems Protocols All hardware and software included under this section shall conform to BACnet standard 135 -2001, to promote interoperability between building subsystems. Additionally, the BAS design must include solutions for the integration of the following "open systems" protocols: LonTalkTM, Modbus, and digital data communication to third party microprocessors such as chiller controllers, fire panels and variable frequency drives (VFDs). HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923 -7 �r. Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 PM shall connect directly to this network without the need for Gateway devices. C. Level 2 Network Description 1. Level 2 of the system shall consist of one or more BACnet MS/TP field "^ buses managed by the Network Router /Controllers. Minimum speed shall be 76.8kbps. The Level 2 field bus consists of an RS485, token passing bus that supports up to 127 Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs) for operation of HVAC equipment and lighting D. BAS LAN Segmentation 1. The BAS shall be capable of being segmented, through software, into *" multiple local area networks (LANs) distributed over a wide area network (WAN), sharing a single file server. This enables workstations to manage a single LAN (or building), and /or the entire system with all devices being assured of being updated by and sharing the most current database. In the case of a single workstation system, the workstation shall contain the entire database — with no need for a separate file server. �,. E. Standard Network Support 1. All NRCs, Workstation(s) and File Server shall be capable of residing directly on the owner's Ethernet TCP /IP LAN/WAN with no required PM gateways. Furthermore, the NBC's, Workstation(s) and File Server shall be capable of using standard, commercially available, off - the -shelf Ethernet infrastructure components such as routers, switches and hubs. With this design the owner may utilize the investment of an existing or new, enterprise network or structured cabling system. This also allows the option of the maintenance of the LAN/WAN to be performed by the owner's Information Systems Department as all devices utilize standard TCP /IP components. F. System Expansion 1. The BAS system shall be scalable and expandable at all levels of the- """ system using the same software interface, and the same Level 1 and ir. Level 2 controllers. Systems that require replacement of - either the: workstation software or field controllers in order to expand the system shalt PM not be acceptable. 2. Additional web -based operator licenses shall added in the field through an upgrade of the web server's security key, with no re- programming required. 3. The system shall use the same application programming language for all levels: Operator Workstation, Network Router /Controller, and Standalone Digital Control Unit. Furthermore, this single programming language shall be used for all applications: environmental control, and digital data communication interfaces to third party microprocessor -based devices. G. Support For Open Systems Protocols All hardware and software included under this section shall conform to BACnet standard 135 -2001, to promote interoperability between building subsystems. Additionally, the BAS design must include solutions for the integration of the following "open systems" protocols: LonTalkTM, Modbus, and digital data communication to third party microprocessors such as chiller controllers, fire panels and variable frequency drives (VFDs). HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923 -7 �r. 1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 ' 2. The system shall also provide the ability to program custom ASCII communication drivers, that will reside in a BACnet Gateway, for communication to third party systems and devices. These drivers will ' provide real time monitoring and control of the third party systems. Once programmed, these data points shall be monitored and controlled in exactly the same manner as native BAS data points. , 2.2 Network Router /Controllers (NRCs) A. General 1. Network Router Controllers shall combine both network routing functions and control functions into a single unit. NBC's shall route communications between the BACnet/IP network and the BACnet MS/TP field network. They shall also be responsible for monitoring and controlling their own HVAC equipment such as an AHU or boiler. A sufficient number of NRCs = shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and - the attached point list. ' 2. Each NRC shall be classified as a "native" BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Building Controller (B -BC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B -SA are not acceptable. NRCs shall be tested and ' - certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application - Controllers (B -BC). B. Hardware Specifications 1. Memory: ' a. Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for the controller, shall be stored in non - volatile, FLASH memory. Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory. 2. Communication Ports: ' a. Each NRC shall provide communication to both the Workstation(s) and the field buses. An on -board 10 /100bT Ethernet port shall be , provided, as well as a RS -485 port for communications to a maximum of 127 MS/TP devices. 3. Modular Expandability: a. The system shall employ a modular 1/0 design to allow easy expansion. Input and output capacity is to be provided through plug - in modules of various types. It shall be possible to combine 1/0 modules as desired to meet the 1/0 requirements for individual control applications. 4. Hardware Override Switches: a. All digital outputs shall include three position manual override ' switches to allow selection of the ON, OFF, or AUTO output state. These switches shall be built into the unit and shall provide feedback to the controller so that the position of the override switch can be obtained through software. In addition each analog output HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923 -8 ' d Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project shall be equipped with an override potentiometer to allow manual adjustment of the analog output signal over its full range, when the 3 position manual override switch is placed in the ON position. 5. Local Status Indicator Lamps: a. Provide as a minimum LED indication of CPU status, Ethernet LAN status, and field bus status. For each output, provide LED indication of the value of the output (On /Off). For each output module provide an LED which gives a visual indication of whether any outputs on the module are manually overridden. 6. Real Time Clock (RTC): a. Each NRC shall include a battery- backed, real time clock, accurate to 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap years and be Year 2000 compliant. 7. Power Supply: a. The power supply for the NRCs shall be auto sensing, 24Vac /10- 40Vdc power, with a tolerance of +/- 20 %. Line voltage below the operating range of the system shall be considered outages. The controller shall contain over voltage surge protection, and require no additional AC power signal conditioning. Automatic Restart After Power Failure: a. Upon restoration of power after an outage, the NRC shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored functions; resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start -up strategies as required. 9. Battery backup: IC01 a. The NRC shall include an on -board battery to back up the controller's RAM memory. The battery shall provide accumulated backup of all RAM and clock functions for at least 30 days. In the, case of a power failure, the NRC shall first try to restarf from the RAM memory. If that memory is corrupted or unusable; Then the NRC shall restart itself from its application program stared .in its FLASH memory. 2.3 Software Specifications A. General. 1. The NRC shall contain FLASH memory to store both the resident Irrr operating system AND the application software. There will be no restrictions placed on the type of application programs in the system. Each NRC shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of any other program. Each program shall have the full access of all 1/0 facilities of the processor. This execution of control function shall not be interrupted HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS �., 230923-9 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project due to normal user communications including interrogation, program entry, printout of the program for storage, etc. B. User Programming Language: 1. The application software shall be user programmable. This includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control algorithms, parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall be English language -based and programmable by the user. The language shall be structured to allow for the easy configuration of control programs, schedules, alarms, reports, telecommunications, local displays, mathematical calculations, passwords, and histories. The language shall be self- documenting. Users shall be able to place comments anywhere in the body of a program. Program listings shall be configurable by the user in logical groupings. 2. Controllers that use a "canned" program method will not be accepted. C. Control Software: 1. The NRC shall have the ability to perform the following pre- tested control algorithms: a. Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID) b. Self Tuning PID C. Two Position Control d. Digital Filter e. Ratio Calculator f. Equipment Cycling Protection D. Mathematical Functions: 1. Each controller shall be capable of performing basic mathematical functions ( +, `, /), squares, square roots, exponential, logarithms, Boolean logic statements, or combinations of both. The controllers shall be capable of performing complex logical statements including operators such as >, <, =, and, or, exclusive or, etc. These must be able to be used in the same equations with the mathematical operators and nested up to five parentheses deep. 2. Energy Management Applications: NR�Cs shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy management roiAfines: a. Time of Day Scheduling b. Calendar Based Scheduling C. Holiday Scheduling d. Temporary Schedule Overrides HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-10 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project e. f. 9• h. k. I. m Optimal Start Optimal Stop Night Setback Control Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer) Peak Demand Limiting Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling CFM Tracking Heating /Cooling Interlock Free Cooling IC01 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -1 1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project E. History Logging: Each controller shall be capable of LOCALLY logging any input, output, calculated value or other system variable over user defined time intervals ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes. Any system can be logged in history. A minimum of 1000 values shall be stored in each log. Each log can record either the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point. Logged data shall be downloadable to the Operator Workstation for long term archiving based upon user - defined time intervals, or manual command. F. Alarm Management: 1. For each system point, alarms can be created based on high /low limits or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the NRC and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports. 2. Up to 8 alarms can be configured for each point in the controller. 3. Alarms will be generated based on their priority. A minimum of 255 priority levels shall be provided. 4. If communication with the Operator Workstation is temporarily interrupted, the alarm will be time - stamped and buffered in the NRC. When communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the Operator Workstation if the point is still in the alarm. condition. 5. Alarms must be capable of being routed to any BACnet workstation that conforms to the B -OWS device profile and uses the BACnet/IP protocol. 6. Alarms can be sent to operator cell phone or pager device as requested by the Owner. G. Local Keypad /Display: 1. For each NRC, provide a local display of at least 4 lines, providing current display of all critical inputs and outputs that the NRC is controlling. Provide a keypad such that an operator can log on, scroll through point values, and change setpoints that are changeable. The keypad /display must be capable of being mounted either on the controller, or on a control panel door. 2.4 Embedded Web Server 0 A. Each NRC must have a the ability to serve out customized web pages containing any desired 1/0 values from the entire BAS. ' 2.5 Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs) A. General: 1. Standalone Digital Control Units shall provide control of HVAC, including air handling units, variable air volume boxes, convectors, pumps, and other mechanical equipment. Each controller shall be fully programmable, contain its own control programs and will continue to operate in the event of a failure or communication loss to its associated NRC. Each SDCU provided must be a "native" BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B -AAC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B -SA are not acceptable. SDCUs shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B -AAC). HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-12 F U Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project B. Memory: 1. Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for the controller, shall be stored in non - volatile, FLASH memory. Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory. C. Communication Ports: 1. SDCUs shall have a RS -485 communication port to the BACnet MS/TP field bus, operating at a speed of at least 76.8kbps. D. Input/Output: 1. Each SDCU shall have enough inputs and outputs to meet the application's required point count. Each SDCU shall support universal inputs, whereas any input may be software - defined as: a. Digital Inputs for status /alarm contacts b. Thermistor Inputs for measuring temperatures in space, ducts and thermowells. C. Analog inputs for pressure, humidity, flow and position measurements. 2. SDCU's must support both digital and analog output types: a. Digital Outputs for on /off equipment control. b. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of primary equipment. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-13 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project E. Expandability: 1. For larger controllers (16 base inputs and up), provide input and output expansion through the use of plug -in modules. At least two 1/0 modules must be capable of being added to the base SDCU. F. Hardware Override Switches: All digital outputs on air handling unit controllers shall include three position manual override switches to allow selection of the ON, OFF, or AUTO output state. These switches shall be built into the unit and shall provide feedback to the controller so that the position of the override switch can be obtained through software. In addition each analog output on air handling unit controllers shall be equipped with an override potentiometer to allow manual adjustment of the analog output signal over its full range, when the 3 position manual override switch is placed in the ON position. G. Room Sensor Support: 1. The SDCU shall support a basic room thermistor in plain plastic cover; a room sensor with override and setpoint adjust slider; and, a sensor with a one -line display and 6- button keypad. The display sensor shall be able to display the current temperature, setpoint, outside air temperature, relative humidity and setpoint, occupancy mode, and CFM of the individual zone. H. Networking: Each SDCU will be able to exchange information on a peer to peer basis with other Standalone Digital Control Units, according to the BACnet MS/TP protocol. Each SDCU shall be capable of storing and referencing global variables (on the LAN) with or without any workstations online. Each SDCU shall be able to have its program viewed and /or enabled /disabled through a workstation connected to an NRC. I. Indicator Lamps: 1. SDCUs will have as a minimum, LED indication of CPU status, and field bus status. J. Real Time Clock (RTC): 1. All SDCUs shall have a real time clock in either hardware or software. The accuracy shall be within 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following information: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. Each SDCU shall receive a signal, every hour, over the network from the NRC, which synchronizes all SDCU real time clocks. K. Automatic Restart After Power Failure: 1. Upon restoration of power, the SDCU shall automatically and without human intervention, update all monitored functions, resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start -up strategies as required. L. Battery Back Up: All SDCUs shall store all programming in non - volatile FLASH memory. All SDCUs except terminal controllers shall include an on -board lithium battery to back up the controller's RAM memory. The battery shall have a shelf life of over 10 years, and provide accumulated backup of all RAM and clock functions for at least 3 years. In the case of a power failure, the SDCU shall first try to restart from the RAM memory. If that memory is HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Y Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 rr corrupted or unusable, then the SDCU shall restart itself from its application program stored in its FLASH memory. M. Software - General. 1. The SDCU shall contain FLASH memory to store both the resident operating system AND the application software. There will be no restrictions placed on the type of application programs in the system. Each SDCU shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of any other program. Each program shall have the full access of all 1/0 facilities of the processor. This execution of control function shall not be interrupted due to normal user communications including interrogation, program entry, printout of the program for storage, etc. N. User Programming Language: 1. The application software shall be user programmable, using the same language as that defined for Network Router /Controllers. Controllers that use a "canned" program method will not be accepted. 2. Control Software, Mathematical Functions, and Energy Management Applications must be identical to that which is provided with the Network Router /Controller. O. History Logging: 1. Each controller shall be capable of LOCALLY logging any input, output, calculated value or other system variable over user defined time intervals ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes. Any system can be logged in history. A minimum of 1000 values shall be stored in each log. Each log can record either the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point. Logged data shall be downloadable to the Operator Workstation for long term archiving based upon user - defined time intervals, or manual command. P. Alarm Management: 1. For each system point, alarms can be created based on high /low limits or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the SDCU and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports. 2. Up to 8 alarms can be configured for each point in the controller. 3. Alarms will be generated based on their priority. A minimum of 255 priority levels shall be provided. 4. If communication with the Operator Workstation is temporarily ' itterrupted" -, the alarm will be time - stamped and buffered in the controller.;. When communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the' .Operator Workstation if the point is still in the alarm condition. 5. Alarms must be capable of being routed to any BACnet workstatibh that conforms to the B -OWS device profile and uses the BACnet/IP protocol. Q. Air Handling Unit Controllers 1. Air Handling Unit Controllers shall conform to the BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B -AAC) device profile. 2. Air Handling Unit Controllers shall be capable of meeting the requirements of the sequence of operation found in the Execution portion of this specification and for future expansion. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-15 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3. Air Handling Unit Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs as required by the sequence and operate in a standalone fashion. 4. Air Handling Unit Controllers shall be fully user programmable to allow for modification of the application software. 5. A manual override switch shall be provided for all digital and analog outputs on the Air Handling Unit Controllers. The position of the switch shall be monitored in software and available for operator displays and alarm notification. R. Local Keypad /Display: 1. For each air handler SDCU, provide a local display of at least 4 lines, providing current display of all critical inputs and outputs that the SDCU is controlling. Provide a keypad such that an operator can log on, scroll through point values, and change setpoints that are changeable. The keypad /display must be capable of being mounted either on the controller, or on a control panel door. 2:6 VAV Terminal Unit Controllers A- VAV Controllers shall conform to the BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B- AAC) device profile. B. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support, but not be limited to the control of the following configurations of VAV boxes to address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion: 1. Single Duct Cooling Only 2. Single Duct Cooling with Reheat (Hot Water) C. VAV Controllers for single duct applications will come equipped with a built -in actuator for modulation of the air damper. The actuator shall have a minimum torque rating of 35 in. -lb., and contain an override mechanism for manual positioning of the damper during startup and service. D. VAV Controllers shall contain an integral velocity sensor accurate to +/- 5% of the full range of the box's CFM rating. E. Each controller shall perform the sequence of operation described in Part 3 of this specification, and have the capability for local time of day scheduling, occupancy mode control, after hours operation, lighting control, alarming, and trending. F. VAV Controllers shall be able to communicate with any other Standalone Digital Control Unit on the same MS/TP field bus. 2.7 Unitary Controllers A. Unitary Controllers shall conform to the BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B -AAC) device profile. B. Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the following systems as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I F f� Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project C. The 1/0 of each Unitary Controller shall contain the sufficient quantity and types as required to meet the sequence of operation found in the Execution portion of this specification. In addition, each controller shall have the capability for local time of day scheduling, occupancy mode control, after hour operation, lighting control, alarming, and trending. D. Unitary Controllers shall be able to communicate with any other Standalone Digital Control Unit on the same MS/TP field bus. 2.8 BACnet Gateway to Third -Party Devices A. General: 1. Where required, provide a BACnet Gateway to interface to non - BACnet systems that use the Modbus protocol, LONworks protocol, or other proprietary protocol. The Gateway shall communicate directly over Ethernet TCP /IP, and shall use the BACnet/IP protocol to communicate with a BACnet Workstation (B -OWS). B. Communication Ports: 1. In addition to its on -board Ethernet port, the Gateway shall have at least two serial communications ports for interfaces to third -party systems. C. Memory: 1. The Gateway shall have enough RAM memory to store all point configuration data, plus required history logging and alarm buffering. Minimum RAM shal be 8M6. The operating system of the gateway must be stored in FLASH non - volatile memory. D. User Programming Language: 1. The Gateway shall employ the same user programmable application software that NRCs and SDCUs use. 2. Control Software, Mathematical Functions, and Energy Management Applications must be identical to that which is provided with the Network Router /Controller. Gateways that do not have an application programming language will not be accepted. E. History Logging: Each Gateway shall be capable of LOCALLY logging any input, output, calculated value or other system variable over user defined time intervals ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes. Any system can be logged in history. A minimum of 1000 values shall be stored in each log. Each log can record either the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point. Logged data shall be downloadable to the Operator Workstation for long term archiving based upon user = .defined the intervals, or manual command. 2.9 Operator Workstation Requirements A. General. 1. The operator workstation portion of the BAS shall consist of '.,one, or aide full - powered configuration and programming workstations, :and one br more web -based operator workstations. For this project provide:` 1 programming workstations and 1 web -based user licenses. - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-17 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 2. The programming and configuration workstation software shall be configurable as either a single workstation system (with a local database) or multi- workstation system where the database is located on a central file server. The client software on multi- workstation system shall access the file server database program via an Ethernet TCP /IP network running at 100MBPS. 3. The web -based user interface software must be capable of expansion up to 100 concurrent users. 4. All workstation software, both programming and software and web -based operator software, shall conform to the BACnet B -OWS device profile, using BACnet/IP to communicate to other BACnet devices. 5. All configuration workstations shall be Pentium 4 -based personal computers operating under the Microsoft Windows XP operating system. The application software shall be capable of communication to all Network Router /Controllers and Standalone Digital Control Units, feature high - resolution color graphics, alarming, reporting, and be user configurable for all data collection and data presentation functions. 6. For multi- workstation systems, a minimum of 256 workstations shall be allowed on the Ethernet network along with the central file server. In this client/server configuration, any changes or additions made from one workstation will automatically appear on all other workstations without the requirement for manual copying of files. Multi- workstation systems with no central database will not be acceptable. Multi- workstation systems with distributed /tiered file servers and a central (master) database will be acceptable. B. Administration /Programming Workstation Requirements (Single workstation or multi- workstation configuration). 1. The workstation shall consist of the following: a. 3 GHz Pentium 4 processor with 1 GB of RAM b. Microsoft Windows XPTM operating system C. Serial port, parallel port, USB port d. 10 /100MBPS Ethernet NIC e. 80 GB hard disk f. CD -RW drive g. High resolution (minimum 1280 x 1024), 17" flat panel display h. Optical mouse and full function keyboard i. Audio sound card and speakers j. License agreement for all applicable software. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-18 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 C. Web -Based Operator PC Requirements 1. Any user on the network can access the system, using the following software: 2. Windows 2000 /XP 3. Internet Explorer 6.0 and above 4. Java - enabled D. Modem 1. Provide one Windows XP- compatible 56 Kbaud modem for. "dial- iry.-,; diagnostics. E. Printer 1. Provide an alarm printer and a separate report/graphics printer. The -alarm printer shall be an Epson dot matrix or equivalent and the report printer ✓� shall be a black- and -white HP LaserJet. W* 2.10 Administration and Programming Workstation Software bw A. General Description 1. The software architecture must be object- oriented in design, a true 32 -bit application suite utilizing Microsoft's OLE, COM, DCOM and ODBC technologies. These technologies make it easy to fully utilize the power of the operating system to share, among applications (and therefore to the users of those applications), the wealth of data available from the BAS. 2. The workstation functions shall include monitoring and programming of all DDC controllers. Monitoring consists of alarming, reporting, graphic displays, long term data storage, automatic data collection, and operator - initiated control actions such as schedule and setpoint adjustments. 3. Programming of controllers shall be capable of being done either off -line or on -line from any operator workstation. All information will be available in graphic or text displays. Graphic displays will feature animation effects to enhance the presentation of the data, to alert operators of problems, and to facilitate location of information throughout the DDC system. All operator functions shall be selectable through a mouse. B. System Database The files server database engine must be Microsoft SQL Server, or another ODBC - compliant, relational database program. This ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) - compliant database engine allows for an owner to write custom applications and /or reports which communicate directly with the database avoiding data transfer routines to update other applications. The system database shall contain all point configurations and programs in each of the controllers that have been assigned to the network. In addition, the database will contain all workstation files including color graphic, alarm reports, text reports, historical data logs, schedules, and polling records. C. User Interface 0 1. The BAS workstation software shall allow the creation of a custom, browser -style interface linked to the user that has logged into the workstation software. This interface shall support the creation of "hot - spots" that the user may link to view /edit any object in the system or run irr HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-19 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project any object editor or configuration tool contained in the software. Furthermore, this interface must be able to be configured to become a user's "PC Desktop" — with all the links that a user needs to run other applications. This, along with the Windows XP user security capabilities, will enable a system administrator to setup workstation accounts that not only limit the capabilities of the user within the BAS software but may also limit what a user can do on the PC and /or LAN/WAN. This might be used to ensure, for example, that the user of an alarm monitoring workstation is unable to shutdown the active alarm viewer and /or unable to load software onto the PC. D. User Security 1. The software shall be designed so that each user of the software can have a unique username and password. This username /password combination shall be linked to a set of capabilities within the software, set by and editable only by, a system administrator. The sets of capabilities shall range from View only, Acknowledge alarms, Enable /disable and change - values, Program, and Administer. The system shall allow the above capabilities to be applied independently to each and every class of object — in the system. The system must allow a minimum of 256 users to be configured per workstation. There shall be an inactivity timer adjustable in software that automatically logs off the current operator after the timer has expired. E Configuration Interface 1. The workstation software shall use a familiar Windows ExplorerTm style interface for an operator or programmer to view and /or edit any object (controller, point, alarm, report, schedule, etc.) in the entire system. In addition, this interface shall present a "network map" of all controllers and their associated points, programs, graphics, alarms, and reports in an easy to understand structure. All object names shall be alphanumeric and use Windows long filename conventions. 2. The configuration interface shall also include support for template objects. These template objects shall be used as building blocks for the creation of the BAS database. The types of template objects supported shall include all data point types (input, output, string variables, setpoints, etc.), alarm algorithms, alarm notification objects, reports, graphics displays, schedules, and programs. Groups of template object types shall be able to be set up as template subsystems and systems. The template system shall prompt for data entry if necessary. The template system shall maintain a link to all "child" objects created by each template. If a user wishes to make a change to a template object, the software shall ask the user if he /she wants to update all of the child objects with the change. This template system shall facilitate configuration and programming consistency and afford the user a fast and simple method to make global changes to the BAS. F. Color Graphic Displays The system shall allow for the creation of user defined, color graphic displays for the viewing of mechanical and electrical systems, or building schematics. These graphics shall contain point information from the database including any attributes associated with the point (engineering units, etc.). In addition operators shall be able to command equipment or change setpoints from a graphic through the use of the mouse. The Contractor shall provide building plan graphics showing all mechanical and HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -20 t 9 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project electrical systems controlled or monitored by the BAS system. P" Requirements of the color graphic subsystem include: a. SVGA, bit - mapped displays. Initial programming shall include AutoCAD generated picture files as background displays. b. A built -in library of animated objects such as dampers, fans, pumps, buttons, knobs, gauges, ad graphs which can be "dropped" on a graphic through the use of a software configuration "wizard ". These objects shall enable operators to interact with the graphic displays in a manner that mimics their mechanical equivalents found on field installed control panels. Using the mouse, operators shall be able to adjust setpoints, start or stop equipment, modify PID loop parameters, or change schedules. C. Status changes or alarm conditions must be able to be highlighted by objects changing screen location, size, color, text, blinking or changing from one display to another. d. Ability to link graphic displays through user defined objects, alarm testing, or the result of a mathematical expression. Operators must be able to change from one graphic to another by selecting an object with a mouse - no menus will be required. e. If separate, provide a copy of the full graphic editing software on each workstation. G. Automatic monitoring 1. The software shall allow for the automatic collection of data and reports from any controller through either a hardwire or modem communication link. The frequency of data collection shall be completely user - configurable. H. Alarm Management 1. The software shall be capable of accepting alarms directly from controllers, or generating alarms based on evaluation of data in controllers and comparing to limits or conditional equations configured through the software. Any alarm (regardless of its origination) will be integrated into the overall alarm management system and will appear in all standard alarm reports, be available for operator acknowledgment, and have the option for displaying graphics, or reports. 2. Alarm management features shall include: a. A minimum of 255 alarm notification levels. Each notification level will establish a unique set of parameters for controlling alarm display, acknowledgment, keyboard annunciation, alarm, printout, 66 and record keeping. b. Automatic logging in the database of the alarm message, point. 0 name, point value, connected controller, timestamp, usemame an i time of acknowledgement, username and time of alarm sBence: (soft acknowledgement) HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -21 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project C. Automatic printing of the alarm information or alarm report to an alarm printer or report printer. d. Playing an audible beep or audio (wav) file on alarm initiation or return to normal. e. Sending an email or alphanumeric page to anyone listed in a workstation's email account address list on either the initial occurrence of an alarm and /or if the alarm is repeated because an operator has not acknowledged the alarm within a user - configurable timeframe. The ability to utilize email and alphanumeric paging of alarms shall be a standard feature of the software integrated with the operating system's mail application interface (MAPI). No special software interfaces shall be required. f. Individual alarms shall be able to be re- routed to a workstation or workstations at user - specified times and dates. For example, a critical high temp alarm can be configured to be routed to a Facilities Dept. workstation during normal working hours (7am -6pm, Mon -Fri) and to a Central Alarming workstation at all other times. g. An active alarm viewer shall be included which can be customized for each user or user type to hide or display any alarm attributes. h. The font type and color, and background color for each alarm notification level as seen in the active alarm viewer shall be customizable to allow easy identification of certain alarm types or alarm states. i. The active alarm viewer can be configured such that an operator must type in text in an alarm entry and /or pick from a drop -down list of user actions for certain alarms. This ensures accountability (audit trail) for the response to critical alarms. Custom Report Generation 1. The software will contain a built -in custom report generator, featuring word processing tools for the creation of custom reports. These custom reports shall be able to be set up to automatically run or be generated on demand. Each workstation shall be able to associate reports with any word processing or spreadsheet program loaded on the machine. When the report is displayed, it will automatically spawn the associated report editor such as MS WordTM a. Reports can be of any length and contain any point attributes from any controller on the network. b. The report generator will have access to the user programming language in order to perform mathematical calculations inside the body of the report, control the display output of the report, or prompt the user for additional information needed by the report. C. It shall be possible to run other executable programs whenever a report is initiated. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-22 1 I 1 a y Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project d. Report Generator activity can be tied to the alarm management system, so that any of the configured reports can be displayed in response to an alarm condition. e. Standard reports shall include: 1) Points in each controller. 2) Points in alarm 3) Disabled points 4) Overridden points 5) Operator activity report 6) Alarm history log. 7) Program listing by controller with status. 8) Network status of each controller J. Spreadsheet -style reports 1. The software shall allow the simple configuration of row /column` -- (spreadsheet - style) reports on any class of object in the system. These reports shall be user - configurable and shall be able to extract live (controller) data and /or data from the database. The user shall be able to set up each report to display in any text font, color and background color. In addition the report shall be able to be configured to filter data, sort data and highlight data which meets user - defined criteria. K. HTML Reporting The above spreadsheet -style reports shall be able to be run to an HTML template file. This feature will create an HTML "results" file in the directory of the HTML template. This directory can be shared with other computer users, which will allow those users with access to the directory to "point" their web browser at the file and view the report. L. Scheduling 1. It shall be possible to configure and download from the workstation schedules for any of the controllers on the network. a. Time of day schedules shall be in a calendar style and shall be programmable for a minimum of one year in advance. Each standard day of the week and user - defined day types shall be able to be associated with a color so that when the schedule is viewed it is very easy, at- a- glance, to determine the schedule for a particular day even from the yearly view. To change the schedule for a particular day, a user shall simply click on the day and then click on the day type. b. Each schedule will appear on the screen viewable as the entire year, monthly, week and day. A simple mouse click shall allow switching between views. It shall also be possible to scroll from one month to the next and view or alter any of the schedule times. C. Schedules will be assigned to specific controllers and stored in their local RAM memory. Any changes made at the workstation will be automatically updated to the corresponding schedule in the controller. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -23 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project M. Programmer's Environment 1. The programmer's environment will include access to a superset of the same programming language supported in the controllers. Here the programmer will be able to configure application software off -line (if desired) for custom program development, write global control programs, system reports, wide area networking data collection routines, and custom alarm management software. On the same screen as the program editor, the programming environment shall include dockable debug and watch bars for program debugging and viewing updated values and point attributes during programming. In addition a wizard tool shall be available for loading programs from a library file in the program editor. N. Saving /Reloading 1. The workstation software shall have an application to save and restore field controller memory files. This application shall not be limited to saving and reloading an entire controller — it must also be able to save /reload - individual objects in the controller. This allows off -line debugging of control programs, for example, and then reloading of just the modified information. A full copy of the original programming conditions shall be provided to the Owner at the time of training completion. O. Data Logging The workstation software shall have the capability to easily configure groups of data points with trend logs and display the trend log data. A group of data points shall be created by drag- and -drop method of the points into a folder. The trend log data shall be displayed through a simply menu selection, or from a hot spot on a graphic display. This data shall be able to be saved to file and /or printed. P. Audit Trail The workstation software shall automatically log and timestamp every operation that a user performs at a workstation, from logging on and off a workstation to changing a point value, modifying a program, enabling /disabling an object, viewing a graphic display, running a report, modifying a schedule, etc. 0. Fault Tolerant File Server Operation The system shall provide the option to provide fault tolerant operation in the event of the loss of the CPU, disk drives, or other hardware required to maintain the operational integrity of the system. Operational integrity includes all user interfaces, monitoring of alarm points and access points, and executing access control functions. 2. The switchover mechanism provided shall be automatic. Should the failure be caused by hardware, then the system shall immediately switch to the Backup computer. Should the system failure be caused by software (instruction or data), the system shall not pass the faulted code to the Backup computer, otherwise the Backup shall fail in the same manner of the Primary computer. 3. Switchover to the Backup computer shall be initiated and effective (complete) in a manner and time frame that precludes the loss of event data, and shall be transparent to the system users, except for an advisory alarm message indicating that the switchover has occurred. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-24 t t i t 1 1 OM R Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 4. When the system fails -over from the Primary to the Backup computer, no alarm or other event shall be lost, and the Backup computer shall take control of all system functions. 5. A single component failure in the system shall not cause the entire system to fail. All system users shall be informed of any detectable component failure via an alarm event. System users shall not be logged off as a result of a system failure or switchover. 6. The Primary computer shall provide continual indication that the Backup computer is unavailable until such time that the fault has been purged. 2.11 Web -based Operator Software A. Day -to -day operation of the system shall be accessible through a standard web browser interface, allowing technicians and operators to view any part of the system from anywhere on the network. Access to the system must be available from a dial -in connection over the Internet. B. Graphic Displays 1. The browser -based interface must share the same graphical displays as the Administration and Programming Workstations, presenting dynamic data on site layouts, floor plans, and equipment graphics. The browser's graphics shall support commands to change setpoints, enable /disable equipment and start/stop equipment. 2. Through the browser interface, operators must be able to navigate through the entire system, and change the value or status of any point in any controller. Changes are effective immediately to the controller, with a copy stored in the system database. C. Alarm Management Through the browser interface, a live alarm viewer identical to the alarm viewer on the Administration and Programming workstation shall be presented, if the user's password allows it. Users must be able to receive alarms, silence alarms, and acknowledge alarms through a browser. If desired, specific operator text must be able to be added to the alarm record before acknowledgement. D. Groups and Schedules 1. Through the browser interface, operators must be able to view pre- defined groups of points, with their values updated automatically. 2. Through the browser interface, operators must be able 'to change schedules — change start and stop times, and add new times ta- a schedule. E. User Accounts and Audit Trail 1. The same user accounts shall be used for the browser interface; and :for the operator workstations. Operators must not be forced to 'memos e multiple passwords. 2. All commands and user activity through the browser interface shall i6 recorded in the system's activity log, which can be later searched and retrieved by user, date, or both. 2.12 DDC Sensors and Point Hardware ,,. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-25 it IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project ICO1 A. Temperature Sensors 1. All temperature devices shall use precision thermistors accurate to +/- 1 degree F over a range of —30 to 230 degrees F. Space temperature sensors shall be accurate to +/- .5 degrees F over a range of 40 to 100 degrees F. 2. Standard space sensors shall be available in an off white enclosure for mounting on a standard electrical box. 3. Where manual overrides are required, the sensor housing shall feature both an optional sliding mechanism for adjusting the space temperature setpoint, as well as a push button for selecting after hours operation. 4. Where a local display is specified, the sensor shall incorporate either an LED or LCD display for viewing the space temperature, setpoint and other operator selectable parameters. Using built in buttons, operators shall be able to adjust setpoints directly from the sensor. 5. Duct temperature sensors shall incorporate a thermistor bead embedded at the tip of a stainless steel tube. Probe style duct sensors are useable in - air handling applications where the coil or duct area is less than 14 square feet. 6. Averaging sensors shall be employed in ducts which are larger than 14 square feet. The averaging sensor tube must contain at least one thermistor for every 3 feet, with a minimum tube length of 12 feet. 7. Immersion sensors shall be employed for measurement of temperature in all chilled and hot water applications as well as refrigerant applications. Thermal wells shall be brass or stainless steel for non - corrosive fluids below 250 degrees F and 300 series stainless steel for all other applications. 8. A pneumatic signal shall not be allowed for sensing temperature. B. Humidity Sensors 1. Humidity devices shall be accurate to +/- 5% at full scale for space and 3% for duct and outside air applications. Suppliers shall be able to demonstrate that accuracy is NIST traceable. 2. Provide a hand held field calibration tool that both reads the output of the sensor and contains a reference sensor for ongoing calibration. C. Pressure Sensors 1. Air pressure measurements in the range of 0 to 10" water column will be accurate to +/- 1% using a solid -state sensing element. Acceptable manufacturers include Modus Instruments and Mamac. 2. Differential pressure measurements of liquids or gases shall be accurate to =/- 0.5% of range. The housing shall be Nema 4 rated. D. Flow Sensors 1. Provide an insertion vortex flowmeter for measurement of liquid, gas or steam flows in pipe sizes above 3 inches. 2. Install the flow meter on an isolation valve to permit removal without process shutdown. 3. Sensors shall be manufactured by EMCO or approved equal. E. Dampers HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -26 i Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 1. Automatic dampers, furnished by the Building Automation Contractor shall ., be single or multiple blade as required. Dampers are to be installed by the I. HVAC Contractor under the supervision of the BAS Contractor. All blank - Wo off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than duct size dampers are the responsibility of the Sheet Metal Contractor. 2. Damper frames are to be constructed of 13 gauge galvanized sheet steel mechanically joined with linkage concealed in the side channel to eliminate noise as friction. Compressible spring stainless steel side seals and acetal or bronze bearings shall also be provided. 3. Damper blade width shall not exceed eight inches. Seals. and 3/8 inch square steel zinc plated pins are required. Blade rotation is to be parallel or opposed as shown on the schedules. 4. For high performance applications, control dampers will meet or exceed the UL Class I leakage rating. 5. Control and smoke dampers shall be Ruskin, or approved equal. 6. Provide opposed blade dampers for modulating applications and parallel blade for two position control. F. Damper Actuators 1. Damper actuators shall be electronic, and shall be direct coupled over the shaft, without the need for connecting linkage. The actuator shall have electronic overload circuitry to prevent damage. For power - failure /safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Non - spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Contractor Responsibilities i A. General = 1. Installation of the building automation system shall be performed,, by the Contractor or a subcontractor. However, all installation shall be under the. personal supervision of the Contractor. The Contractor shall-certify atl work as proper and complete. Under no circumstances shall the design scheduling, coordination, programming, training, and warranty requirements for the project be delegated to a subcontractor. B. Access to Site 1. Unless notified otherwise, entrance to building is restricted. No one will be permitted to enter the building unless their names have been cleared with the Owner or the Owner's Representative. 3.2 Code Compliance A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable electrical codes and will comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Should any discrepancy be found between wiring specifications in Division 23 and Division 26, wiring requirements of Division 23 will prevail for work specified in Division 23 3.3 Cleanup r" 0 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-27 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project A. At the completion of the work, all equipment pertinent to this contract shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned, and all other areas shall be cleaned around equipment provided under this contract. 3.4 Wiring, Conduit, and Cable A. All wire will be copper and meet the minimum wire size and insulation class listed below: IC01 Wire Class Wire Size Isolation Class Power 12 Gauge 600 Volt Class One 14 Gauge Std. 600 Volt Class Two 18 Gauge Std. 300 Volt Class Three 18 Gauge Std. 300 volt Communications Per Mfr. Per Mfr. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -28 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and Three wiring and communications wiring may be run in the same conduit. 2. Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain clearances and install barriers per the National Electric Code. 3. Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, EMT shall be used. Conduit shall be minimum 1/2 inch galvanized EMT. Set screw fittings are acceptable for dry interior locations. Watertight compression fittings shall be used for exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture. Provide conduit sealoff fitting where exterior conduits enter the building or between areas of high temperature /moisture differential. 4. Flexible metallic conduit (max. 3 feet) shall be used for connections to motors, actuators, controllers, and sensors mounted on vibration producing equipment. Liquid -tight flexible conduit shall be use in exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture. 5. Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment termination, and transitions from EMT to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J -boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel, nominal four -inch square with blank cover. Exterior and damp location JH -boxes shall be cast alloy FS boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed covers. 6. Where the space above the ceiling is a supply or return air plenum, the wiring shall be plenum rated. Teflon wiring can be run without conduit above suspended ceilings. EXCEPTION: Any wire run in suspended ceilings that is used to control outside air dampers or to connect the system to the fire management system shall be in conduit. 7. Fiber optic cable shall include the following sizes; 50/125, 62.5/125 or 100/140. j" 8. Only glass fiber is acceptable, no plastic. 0, 9. Fiber optic cable shall only be installed and terminated by an experienced contractor. The BAS contractor shall submit to the Engineer the name' if the intended contractor of the fiber optic cable with his - submittal. documents. 3.5 Hardware Installation A. Installation Practices for Wiring 1. All controllers are to be mounted vertically and per the manufacturer's -.: installation documentation . 2. The 120VAC power wiring to each Ethernet or Remote Site controller shall be a dedicated run, with a separate breaker. Each run will include a separate hot, neutral and ground wire. The ground wire will terminate at the breaker panel ground. This circuit will not feed any other circuit or device. 3. A true earth ground must be available in the building. Do not use a corroded or galvanized pipe, or structural steel. 4. Wires are to be attached to the building proper at regular intervals such that wiring does not droop. Wires are not to be affixed to or supported by pipes, conduit, etc. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-29 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 5. Conduit in finished areas, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces and wall construction. Exception; metallic surface raceway may be used in finished areas on masonry walls. All surface ' raceway in finished areas must be color matched to the existing finish within the limitations of standard manufactured colors. 6. Conduit, in non - finished areas where possible, will be concealed in ceiling , cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces, and wall construction. Exposed conduit will run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure. 7. Wires are to be kept a minimum of three (3) inches from hot water, steam, or condensate piping. 8. Where sensor wires leave the conduit system, they are to be protected by a plastic insert. 9. Wire will not be allowed to run across telephone equipment areas. B. Installation Practices for Field Devices 1. Well- mounted sensors will include thermal conducting compound within the well to insure good heat transfer to the sensor. 2. Actuators will be firmly mounted to give positive movement and linkage will be adjusted to give smooth continuous movement throughout 100 percent of the stroke. 3. Relay outputs will include transient suppression across all coils. Suppression devices shall limit transients to 150% of the rated coil voltage. 4. Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which they are installed. 5. For duct static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be connected to a metal static pressure probe inserted into the duct pointing upstream. The low pressure port shall be left open to the plenum area at the point that the high pressure port is tapped into the ductwork. 6. For building static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be inserted into the space via a metal tube. Pipe the low pressure port to the outside of the building. C. Enclosures 1. For all 1/0 requiring field interface devices, these devices where practical will be mounted in a field interface panel (FIP). The Contractor shall provide an enclosure which protects the device(s) from dust, moisture, conceals integral wiring and moving parts. 2. FIPs shall contain power supplies for sensors, interface relays and contactors, and safety circuits. 3. The FIP enclosure shall be of steel construction with baked enamel finish, NEMA 1 rated with a hinged door and keyed lock. The enclosure will be sized for twenty percent spare mounting space. All locks will be keyed identically. 4. All wiring to and from the FIP will be to screw type terminals. Analog or communications wiring may use the FIP as a raceway without terminating. The use of wire nuts within the FIP is prohibited. 5. All outside mounted enclosures shall meet the NEMA -4 rating. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 230923-30 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 a. Air Handler Status Report �r HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -31 6. The wiring within all enclosures shall be run in plastic track. Wiring within r,. controllers shall be wrapped and secured. w D. Identification 1. Identify all control wires with labeling tape or sleeves using either words, letters, or numbers that can be exactly cross - referenced with as -built r drawings. 2. All field enclosures, other than controllers, shall be identified with a bakelite nameplate. The lettering shall be in white against a black or blue background. 3. Junction box covers will be marked to indicate that they are a part of the BAS system. 4. All 1/0 field devices (except space sensors) that are not mounted within FIP's shall be identified with name plates. r 5. All 1/0 field devices inside FIP's shall be labeled. Irr E. Location 1. The location of sensors is per mechanical and architectural drawings. f 2. Space humidity or temperature sensors will be mounted away from machinery generating heat, direct light and diffuser air streams. 3. Outdoor air sensors will be mounted on the north building face directly in the outside air. Install these sensors such that the effects of heat radiated from the building or sunlight is minimized. 4. Field enclosures shall be located immediately adjacent to the contrq!Ier panel(s) to which it is being interfaced. 3.6 Software Installation Y A. General. 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start- . up and debug all system software as described in this sectiod. This includes any operating system software or other third party s©ftware LB. necessary for successful operation of the system. Configuration. Database 1. The Contractor will provide all labor to configure those portions of the database that are required by the points list and sequence of operation. C. Color Graphic Displays. 1. Unless otherwise directed by the owner, the Contractor will provide color graphic displays as depicted in the mechanical drawings for each system and floor plan. For each system or floor plan, the display shall contain the associated points identified in the point list and allow for setpoint changes as required by the owner. D. Reports. 1. The Contractor will configure a minimum of 5 reports for the owner as ii listed below: a. Air Handler Status Report �r HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -31 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project b. VAV Status Report HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -32 ICo1 C. Chiller Report d. Boiler Report - e. Space Temperature Report Documentation 1. As built software documentation will include the following: 2. Descriptive point lists 3. Application program listing 4. Application programs with comments. 5. Printouts of all reports. 6. Alarm list. 7. Printouts of all graphics 3.7 Commissioning and System Startup A. Point to Point Checkout. 1. Each 1/0 device (both field mounted as well as those located in FIPs) shall be inspected and verified for proper installation and functionality. A checkout sheet itemizing each device shall be filled out, dated and approved by the Project Manager for submission to the owner or owner's representative. B. Controller and Workstation Checkout. 1. A field checkout of all controllers and front end equipment (computers, printers, modems, etc.) shall be conducted to verify proper operation of both hardware and software. A checkout sheet itemizing each device and a description of the associated tests shall be prepared and submitted to the owner or owner's representative by the completion of the project. C. System Acceptance Testing 1. All application software will be verified and compared against the sequences of operation. Control loops will be exercised by inducing a setpoint shift of at least 10% and observing whether the system successfully returns the process variable to setpoint. Record all test results and attach to the Test Results Sheet. 2. Test each alarm in the system and validate that the system generates the appropriate alarm message, that the message appears at all prescribed destinations (workstations or printers), and that any other related actions occur as defined (i.e. graphic panels are invoked, reports are generated, etc.). Submit a Test Results Sheet to the owner. 3. Perform an operational test of each unique graphic display and report to verify that the item exists, that the appearance and content are correct, and that any special features work as intended. Submit a Test Results Sheet to the owner. 4. Perform an operational test of each third party interface that has been included as part of the automation system. Verify that all points are HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -32 ICo1 3. Air Handling Units — The BAS contractor shall provide all controls to the AHU's and factory- installed VFD's. For AHU's -1 and —3, the hot- and chilled water valves shall modulate as required to maintain discharge temperature of 55° F. The VFD shall modulate to maintain specified duct static pressure. The BAS control contractor shall field mount the pressure sensor 2/3 the way down the ductwork. For AHU -2, the fan shall operate at 50% capacity when the space is occupied by the hood fan is de- energized. Upon energizing the kitchen hood fan, the AHU VFD shall modulate to 100 %. The chilled and hot water control valves shall modulate as required to maintain space temperature setpoint without allowing discharge air temperature to drop below 554F. Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 s heating or cooling by any device. Pumps shall be lead -lag controlled to properly polled, that alarms have been configured, and that any associated graphics and reports have been completed. If the interface involves a file transfer over Ethernet, test any logic that controls the transmission of the file, and verify the content of the specified information. D. Sequences of Operation Ilk 1. Boiler and Chiller Control; Boilers and Chiller shall come with their own DDC controls. See specification for details. The BAS shall interface with factory provided DDC controls thru a BACnet interface. The start-up technician shall be present when the BAS technician is attempting to interface to factory provided controls for assistance and trouble shooting. �., 2. VAV Boxes — The BAS contractor shall provide the DDC controls to the box manufacturer for factory mounting. The factory mounting charge shall be the responsibility of the VAV box manufacturer. The VAV box shall open on a call for cooling from the space thermostat. On a call for heating, the box shall close to a minimum position and the DDC controls shall to modulate the electric heating SCR coil. In the unoccupied mode the VAV box will maintain set -back temperatures. If the space temperature drops below the set -back temperature, the RTU will start to satisfy the space temperature. 3. Air Handling Units — The BAS contractor shall provide all controls to the AHU's and factory- installed VFD's. For AHU's -1 and —3, the hot- and chilled water valves shall modulate as required to maintain discharge temperature of 55° F. The VFD shall modulate to maintain specified duct static pressure. The BAS control contractor shall field mount the pressure sensor 2/3 the way down the ductwork. For AHU -2, the fan shall operate at 50% capacity when the space is occupied by the hood fan is de- energized. Upon energizing the kitchen hood fan, the AHU VFD shall modulate to 100 %. The chilled and hot water control valves shall modulate as required to maintain space temperature setpoint without allowing discharge air temperature to drop below 554F. B r HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -33 4. Boiler and Chillers (and associated pumps) shall operate upon call for heating or cooling by any device. Pumps shall be lead -lag controlled to even run time. Boilers and chillers shall have staging control by the respective factory controls to maximize efficiency. 5. Convectors shall be operate with on -off 2 position control valves, opening upon thermostatic call for heat. END OF SECTION Ilk B r HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 23 09 23 -33 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 23 1123 - NATURAL GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fuel gas piping, specialties, and accessories within the building. 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Gas System Pressure: One pressure range. 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or less. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For fuel gas piping. Include plans and attachments to other Work, B. Field quality - control test reports. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code." C. FMG Standard: Provide components listed in FMG's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" if specified to be FMG approved. D. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A Certified Appliances and Accessories" if specified to be IAS listed. E. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if specified to be UL listed. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123- 1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 A. A. MANUFACTURERS I I C01 In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: C F 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, I the manufacturers specified. PIPING MATERIALS Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E or S; Grade B; Schedule 40; black. 1. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME 816.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends according to ASME 81.20.1. 2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass -to -iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends according to ASME 81.20.1. 3. Cast -Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME 816.1, Class 125. 4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME 1316.9, wrought steel or ASME 1316.11, forged steel. 5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to ASME 81.20.1. 6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME 1316.5. 8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas. B.' Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined. C. Corramon Joining Materials: Refer to Division 23 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joining materials not in this Section. 2.3 PROTECTIVE COATING A Furnish pipe and fittings with factory - applied, corrosion - resistant polyethylene coating for use in corrosive atmosphere. 2.4 SPECIALTIES A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy. B. Quick- Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector. 2.5 VALVES A. Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads. B. Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME 816.5 for steel flanges and according to ASME 616.24 for copper and copper -alloy flanges. NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123- 2 w, F' Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 i6r C. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and IAS listed. D. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball type with chrome - plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless -steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2 -psig (13.8 -kPa) minimum pressure rating. E. Gas Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS - listed bronze body and 125 - psig (860 -kPa) pressure rating. F. Plug Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP -78 cast -iron, lubricated plug valves, with 125 -psig (860 -kPa) pressure rating. G. General -Duty Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: MSS SP -70, ASME 1316.38, cast -iron body gate valves, OS &Y type with solid wedge, suitable for fuel gas service, with "WOG" indicated on valve body, and 125 -psig (860 -kPa) pressure rating. H. Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field - installed, corrosion - resistant screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Use flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings in applications below, unless otherwise, indicated. 1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15) and Smaller: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 (DN 20 and DN 25): Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 3. NPS 1 -1/4 to NPS 4 (DN 32 to DN 100): Steel pipe, malleable -iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Larger Than NPS 4 (DN 100): Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop. B. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Gas valve. C. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Plug valve or general -duty valve. D. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Gas valve. E. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Plug valve. it NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123- 3 wr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3.3 INSTALLATION IC01 A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation requirements and piping joint construction. B. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum - length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap. C. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view. D. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers. E. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. F. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. G. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices. H. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated valve. 1: Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger connections. J. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned -down, reducing -elbow fittings with corrosion- resistant insect screens in large end. 34 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2. NPS 1 -1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 4. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 3 -1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm). NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123- 4 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 5. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch (16 mm). 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance. Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches (1800 mm) of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSI Z223.1, Part 4 "Inspection, Testing, and Purging," and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. END OF SECTION NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123- 5 Mr i 0 E Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project ICo1 SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping, special -duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot -water heating, chilled -water cooling, and condenser water systems; makeup water for these systems; blowdown drain lines; and condensate drain piping. B. See Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general piping materials and installation requirements. C. See Division 23 Section " Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping. D. See Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for temperature - control valves and sensors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. B. Field quality - control test reports. C. Welding certificates. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE - A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME 831.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. B. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections. HYDRONIC PIPING 232113-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. B. Copper Tube and Fittings: 1. Drawn - Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B). 2. Annealed- Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A). 3. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV. 4. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME 616.22. 5. Wrought- Copper Unions: ASME 616.22. 6. folder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95 -5 tin antimony. 7. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg -1 (silver). C. Steel. Pipe and Fittings: 1: .Steel Pipe, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (furnace -butt welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. 2. `_'Steel Pipe, NPS 2 -1/2 through NPS 12 (DN 65 through DN 300): ASTM A 53, Type E (electric- resistance welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. 3. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black steel; seamless for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and electric- resistance welded for NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 4. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300. 5. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300. 6. Grooved Mechanical -Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65 -45 -12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings. 7. Grooved Mechanical -Joint Couplings: Ductile- or malleable -iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure- responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 8. Flexible Connectors: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire - reinforcing protective jacket; 150 -psig (1035 -kPa) minimum working pressure and 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded -end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4- inch (20 -mm) misalignment. 9. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 150 -psig (1035 -kPa) minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip -pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome - plated finish on slip -pipe telescoping section. 10. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design temperatures and pressures. 2.2 VALVES A. General -Duty Valves: Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 23 Section "Valves." B. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125- psig860- kPa working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature, and having HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -2 0 t [_1 n e.• Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 r threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable �., differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. C. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast -iron or steel body, ball type, 125- psig860 -kPa working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. D. Safety Valves: Diaphragm- operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply ,,with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV. 2.3 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 -psig (1035 -kPa) .,working pressure; 225 deg F (107 deg C) operating temperature; manually operated with screWplriver�or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8 (DN 6) discharge connection and NPS 1/2 (DN 15) inlet connection. B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 -psig (1035 -kPa) working pressure; 240 deg F (116 deg C) operating temperature; with NPS 1/4 (DN 8) discharge connection and NPS 1/2 (DN 15) inlet connection. "^ C. Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 125 -psig (860 -kPa) working pressure and it 375 deg F (191 deg C) maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. iho Include the following fittings and accessories: 1. Air - Control Tank Fitting: Cast -iron body, copper - plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless -steel ball check, 100 -gal. (379 -L) unit only; sized for compression -tank diameter. Design tank fittings for 125 -psig (860 -kPa) working pressure and 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature. 2. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125 -psig (860 -kPa) working pressure and 240 deg F (116 deg C) maximum operating temperature; designed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system. 3. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4 -inch- (20 -mm -) diameter gage glass, and slotted -metal glass guard. D. In -Line Air Separators: One -piece cast iron with an integral weir designed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation at a working pressure up to 175 psig (1206 kPa) and liquid temperature up to 300 deg F (149 deg C). E. Air Purgers: Cast -iron body with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air from solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal. Maximum working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa) and temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C). F. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125 -psig (860 -kPa) working pressure; 5- gal. (19 -L) capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves. 1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment. `rr HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -3 Wr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project I IC01 G. Diverting Fittings: 125 -psig (860 -kPa) working pressure; 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature; cast -iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with soldered ends. Indicate flow direction on fitting. H. Y- Pattern Strainers: 125 -psig (860 -kPa) working pressure; cast -iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless -steel basket, and bottom drain connection. I. Flexible Connectors: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire - reinforcing protective jacket; 150 -psig (1035 -kPa) minimum working pressure and 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded -end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4 -inch (20 -mm) misalignment. J. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 150 -psig (1035 -kPa) minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip -pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome - plated finish on slip -pipe telescoping section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. Q.� 3.2 X- PIPING APPLICATIONS Hot and Chilled Water: Aboveground, use Type L (Type B) drawn - temper copper tubing with soldered joints or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L (Type B) drawn - temper copper tubing with soldered joints or Schedule 40, PVC pipe with solvent - welded joints. VALVE APPLICATIONS Unless otherwise indicated, use the following general -duty valve types for applications indicated: 1. ~ = Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Duty: Globe, ball, and butterfly valves. 3. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 4. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. B. Unless otherwise indicated, use the following special -duty valve types for applications indicated: 1. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing. 2. Install safety valves on hot -water generators and elsewhere as required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety -valve discharge piping, without valves, to floor. Comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. 3. Install pressure- reducing valves on hot -water generators and elsewhere as required to regulate system pressure. HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -4 0 u 0 1 1 0 y Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS IC01 A. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. B. C. D. E. F. 3.4 A. ii I>rr Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure- reducing valve, solenoid valve, in -line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 (DN 20) nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger. Match size of strainer'blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 (DN 50). Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers ark¢ Supports." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of supports. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet (6 m) long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP -58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: a. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). b. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). C. NPS 1 -1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). d. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). e. NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). f. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 6. Install hangers for drawn- temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -5 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project I IC01 a. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). b. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 6 feet (1.8 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). G: NPS 1 -1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). A. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). e. NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). f. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 7. Elastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points. 8. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10 -foot (3 -m) intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping; and solvent - welded joints for PVC and CPVC piping. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat - transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. 1. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping, at heat - transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. 2. Install dip -tube fittings in boiler outlet. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Connect boiler - outlet piping. 3. Install in -line air separators in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger. 4. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blowdown piping with gate valve; extend to nearest drain. 5. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) above floor. Install feeder in bypass line, off main, using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between bypass connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain. 6. Install expansion tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on end of tank. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 0 0 1 a. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, and fittings, plus weight of a full tank of water. Do not I overload building components and structural members. 1 HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -6 , F Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 •, ir. 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections. Irr B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. pa C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Prepare hydronic piping and perform testing according to ASME 631.9. Prepare written report of testing. 3.9 ADJUSTING A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position. B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system: 1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves. 2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. 3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers and chillers to design requirements. 8. Lubricate motors and bearings. 3.10 CLEANING A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine -mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers. END OF SECTION ,.., HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -7 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 23 2123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Close- coupled, end - suction centrifugal pumps. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 (QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor - operated water pumps. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 CLOSE - COUPLED, END - SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group. 2. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries. 3. PACO Pumps. 4. Taco, Inc. HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 B. Description: Factory - assembled and - tested, centrifugal, overhung - impeller, close - coupled, end - suction pump as defined in HI 1.1 -1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally. Rate pump for 125 -psig (860 -kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C). C. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, and flanged connections. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper -alloy shaft sleeve. 4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless -steel spring, and bellows and gasket. Include water stinger on shaft between motor and seal. 5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. 6. Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; rigidly mounted to pump casing with integral pump support. 2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175 -psig (1204 -kPa) pressure rating, cast -iron body and end cap, pump -inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless -steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless -steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- fabricated support. B. Triple -Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175 -psig (1204 -kPa) pressure rating, iron body, pump- discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze -fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION A. -- Comply with HI 1.4. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, - couplings, and accessories. C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. D. Set base - mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling before setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment procedure is complete. 1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1 -1/2 inches (19 to 38 mm) between pump base and foundation for grouting. 2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb. HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-2 0 I u 0 0 9 6. Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 3.2 ALIGNMENT A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made. B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions. C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1- 1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation." D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. E. Install triple -duty valve on discharge side of pumps. F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base - mounted pumps between pump casing and valves. H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure -gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple input selector valve. I. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding." J. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123-3 0 h Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 23 2500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL IC01 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water - treatment systems for the following: 1. Heating, hot -water piping (closed -loop system). 2. Chilled -water piping (closed -loop system). 1.3 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Closed -Loop System: One bypass feeder on each system with isolating and drain valves downstream from circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Introduce chemical treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain water quality for HVAC systems that controls corrosion and build -up of scale and biological growth for maximum efficiency of installed equipment without posing a hazard to operating personnel or the environment. B. Base chemical treatment performance requirements on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Closed System: Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and fouling. iliw 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; water - pressure drops; shipping, installed, and operating w. weights; and furnished products listed below: 1. Pumps. 2. Chemical solution tanks. 3. Agitators. 4. Control equipment and devices. 5. Test equipment. !■" 6. Chemicals. 7. Filters. HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 8. Chemical feeders. ' B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads, required ' clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power and control wiring and differentiate between , manufacturer - installed and field - installed wiring. C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. D. Maintenance Data: For pumps, agitators, filters, system controls, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the chemical treatment manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of chemical treatment equipment required for this Project. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, ' Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Scope of Service: Provide chemicals and service program for maintaining optimum conditions in the circulating water for inhibiting corrosion, scale, and organic growths in the cooling, chilled - water piping and heating, hot -water piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, including the following: 1. Initial water analysis and recommendations. 2. Startup assistance. 3. Periodic field service and consultation. 4. Customer report charts and log sheets. 5. Laboratory technical assistance. 6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with government regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.� 'MANUFACTURERS r `A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. HVAC Water- Treatment Products: a. Ampion Corp. b. Anderson Chemical Co., Inc. HVAC WATER TREATMENT , 232500-2 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project C. Aqua -Chem, Inc.; Cleaver- Brooks Div. d. Barclay Chemical Co., Water Management, Inc. e. Betz Dearborn, Inc. f. Calgon Corp., ECC International. g. Diversey Water Technologies, Inc. h. DuBois Chemicals, Inc.; DuBois USA Subsidiary. i. Fluids Pumps & Controllers, Inc. j. Harmsco Industrial Filters. k. Metro Group., Inc.; Metropolitan Refining Div. I. Nalco Chemical Co. M. Selick & Bird, Inc. n. Stewart-Hall, Div. of the Rectorseal Corp. o. Trane Boland Services; Water Treatment. p. Watcon, Inc. IC01 2.2 CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT A. Bypass Feeders: Cast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel shutoff valve on top, air - release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and recirculating shutoff valves on sides. 1. Capacity: 1.8 gal. (6.8 L). 2. Working Pressure: 125 psig (860 kPa). 2.3 CHEMICALS A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water - treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment. B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products. C. Closed -Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH, corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers. 1. Quantity: 30% rust inhibiting propylene glycol. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER ANALYSIS A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of chemical treatment needed to maintain the water quality as specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 3.2 INSTALLATION 60 A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb. .- B. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer. �,. HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500-3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3.3 A. B. C. D. 3.4 IC01 CONNECTIONS Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 26 Sections for connecting electrical equipment. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4866. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Inspect field - assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water - treatment system. 3. Place HVAC water - treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures. B. Test chemical feed piping as follows: 1. `Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved. 2. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare test reports, including required corrective action. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Sample boiler water at one -week intervals after boiler startup for a period of five weeks, and prepare certified test report for each required water performance characteristic. Where applicable, comply with ASTM D 3370 and the following standards: 1. Silica: ASTM D 859. 2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066. HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500-4 u is I 0 r Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067. 4. Iron: ASTM D 1068. 5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126. B. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of Substantial Completion, perform two separate water analyses to prove that automatic chemical feed systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Perform analyses at least 60 days apart. Submit written reports of water analysis. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water - treatment systems and equipment. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules. B. Review manufacturer's safety data sheets for handling of chemicals. C. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended parts inventory and supply sources and on availability of parts and service. Refer to Division 01 Section "Contract Closeout." D. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended parts inventory and supply sources and on availability of parts and service. Refer to Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." END OF SECTION E HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500-5 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply and exhaust air - distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2 -inch wg (minus 500 to plus 2500 Pa). Metal ducts include the following: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single -wall, round spiral -seam ducts and formed fittings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. FRP: Fiberglass- reinforced plastic. B. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air - moving and - distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: ,�. METAL DUCTS 233113 -1 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock - forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M; ducts shall have mill - phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). 2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open -weave fabric strips and mastics. B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches (50 mm) wide; glass- fiber - reinforced fabric. C. Tape Sealing System: Woven -fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic /silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. D. Flanged Joint Mastic: One -part, acid - curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. IA HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder- actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Use powder- actuated concrete fasteners for standard - weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 2. Exception: Do not use powder- actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight- aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. lcol METAL DUCTS 233113 -2 , rtr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all- thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc - chromate primer after installation. 2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- - Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. 3. Galvanized -steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted with zinc - chromate primer. C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self- tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates. 2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION �. A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie -rod applications, and joint types and intervals. rr 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class. 2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible." B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide -on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc. C. Ward Industries, Inc. C. Formed -On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction ;Standa'rds-- Metal and Flexible," Figure 1 -4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer. 2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches (750 mm) wide and up to 2 -inch wg (500 -Pa) pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant. D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480 mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined. METAL DUCTS 233113 -3 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 2.6 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive. D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted -edge overlapping. E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary. F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm (12.7 m /s). G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally. H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: 1. Fan discharges. 2.; Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. 3 - Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500 fpm (12.7 m /s) or where indicated. 2.7: ROUND DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION A. Round, Spiral Lock -Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible." B. Duct Joints: IC01 1. Ducts up to 20 Inches (500 mm) in Diameter: Interior, center - beaded slip coupling, ' sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws. C. 90- Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal -seam straight ducts. D. Diverging -Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance. E. Fabricate elbows using die - formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die- , formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1 -1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows: METAL DUCTS 233113-4 0 x r irr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 1. Mitered -Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. 2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2 -inch wg (minus 500 to plus 500 Pa): a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches (75 to 915 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm). 3. Round Elbows 8 Inches (200 mm) and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die - formed elbows for 45- and 90- degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend -angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. 4. Die - Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches (200 mm) in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick with 2 -piece welded construction. 5. Round Gored -Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non -elbow fittings specified above. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS A. Static - Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following: 1. Supply Ducts: 2 -inch wg (500 Pa). 2. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1 -inch wg (250 Pa). B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel. 3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- -M,eta and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet (3.7 m) unless interrupted by fittings. C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections. E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches (300 mm), with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling. F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness. METAL DUCTS 233113-5 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated. J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke - control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws. L. Non - Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). M. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. N. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches (600 mm) upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized -steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Architectural Sections. 3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- - Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated. 1. For pressure classes lower than 2 -inch wg (500 Pa), seal transverse joints. B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied. 3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection. B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m) and at each floor. C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one -fourth of failure (proof -test) load. -D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete. E. Install powder- actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 1 Do not use powder- actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight- aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories." METAL DUCTS 233113 -6 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports: 1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. 3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round and flat -oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to 2 -inch wg (500 Pa) (both positive and negative pressures). 4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable. END OF SECTION METAL DUCTS 233113 -7 IC01 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 23 3300 - DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL i 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Fire dampers. 4. Turning vanes. 5. Duct - mounting access doors. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Flexible ducts. 8. Duct accessory hardware. B. See Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric and pneumatic damper actuators. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Fire dampers. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Special fittings. 2. Manual- volume damper installations. 3. Fire - damper installations, including sleeves and duct - mounting access doors. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 906, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacernent Project I C01 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock - forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M; ducts shall have mill - phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless -steel ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). 2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. CESCO Products. 4. Duro Dyne Corp. 5. Greenheck. 6. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 7. Prefco Products, Inc. 8. Ruskin Company. 9. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Description: Multiple - blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with blades of maximum 6 -inch (150 -mm) width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle -free manner with 90- degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. C. Frame: 0.052- inch- 1.3 -mm- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners. D. Blades: 0.050 -inch- (1.2 -mm -) thick aluminum sheet. E. Blade Seals: Neoprene. F. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-2 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 4. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 5. METALAIRE, Inc. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 8. Ruskin Company. 9. Vent Products Company, Inc. Yr B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. A 0 C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single - blade, parallel- or opposed -blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat - shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Roll- Formed Steel Blades: 0.064 -inch- (1.62 -mm -) thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. D. Jackshaft: 1 -inch- (25 -mm -) diameter, galvanized -steel pipe rotating within pipe- bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple- damper assemblies. 1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multiple- damper assembly. E. Damper Hardware: Zinc - plated, die -cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 -inch- (2.4 -mm- ) thick zinc - plated steel, and a 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.5 FIRE DAMPERS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck. 2. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 6. Ruskin Company. B. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555. C. Fire Rating: 1 -1/2 hours or as required to match wall rating. DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project I C01 D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll- formed, 0.034 -inch- (0.85 -mm -) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field - installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch (1.3 or 3.5 mm) thick as indicated and of length to suit application. 2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements. F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. G. Blades: Roll- formed, interlocking, 0.034 -inch- (0.85 -mm -) thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full - length, 0.034 -inch- (0.85 -mm -) thick, galvanized -steel blade connectors. H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless -steel closure spring. I. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated. 2.6 TURNING VANES A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - -Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1 -1/2 -inch- (38 -mm -) wide, double -vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1% Available Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Duro Dyne Corp. - - C. METALAIRE, Inc. d. Ward Industries, Inc. 2.7 DUCT- MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1 -by -1 -inch (25- by- 25 -mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products. C. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. e. Greenheck. f. McGill AirFlow Corporation. DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-4 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Ventfabrics, Inc. i. Ward Industries, Inc. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows: a. Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: Secure with two sash locks. b. Up to 18 Inches (450 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. C. Up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two compression latches. d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm) and Larger: One additional hinge. C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and 1 -inch (25 -mm) thickness. Include cam latches. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin -in notched frame. D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber. E. Insulation: 1 -inch- (25 -mm -) thick, fibrous -glass or polystyrene -foam board. 2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc. B. General Description: Flame- retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. C. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. /sq. yd. (880 g /sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf /inch (84 N /mm) in the warp and 360 Ibf /inch (63 N /mm) in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C). 2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Available Manufacturers: frr 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Hart & Cooley, Inc. €` 3. McGill AirFlow Corporation. DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-5 iiw Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 B. Insulated -Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2 -ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 -inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0 -inch wg (250 Pa) negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m /s). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C). C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless -steel band with cadmium - plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm -gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct size. 2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION ;A.. install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- -Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner. E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff. F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL- approved written instructions. H. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers and equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links. DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-6 h Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project tir J IC01 4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50 -foot (15 -m) spacing. 5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available. Install the following sizes for duct - mounting, rectangular access doors: 1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm). 2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm). 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm). 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm). 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm). 6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm). Install the following sizes for duct - mounting, round access doors: 1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter. 2. Two -Hand Access: 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches (460 mm) in diameter. 5. Body Access: 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter. K. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification." L. M. N. O. P. Q. 3.2 Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators. For fans developing static pressures of 5 -inch wg (1250 Pa) and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12 -inch (300 -mm) lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with maximum 60 -inch (1500 -mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. ADJUSTING A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action. C. Final positioning of manual - volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." END OF SECTION low W Vr DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-7 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 23 2316 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Shutoff single -duct air terminal units. IC01 29 *& / WT v / 04'� 0 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include rated capacities, furnished specialties, sound -power ratings, and accessories. B. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. NFPA Compliance: Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHUTOFF SINGLE -DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Krueger. 2. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc. 3. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. 4. Price Industries. 5. Titus. 6. Trane Co. (The); Worldwide Applied Systems Group. AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233616-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 7. Carrier Corporation. I C01 F1 1i B. Configuration: Volume- damper assembly inside unit casing with control components located I inside a protective metal shroud. C. Casing: 0.034 -inch (0.85 -mm) steel. 1. Casing Lining: 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm -) thick, coated, fibrous -glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071; secured with adhesive. 2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S -slip and drive connections for duct attachment. 3. Air Outlet: S -slip and drive connections. 4. Access: Removable panels for access to dampers and other parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket. D. Regulator Assembly: Extruded - aluminum or galvanized -steel components; key damper blades onto shaft with nylon- fitted pivot points located inside unit casing. 1. Automatic Flow - Control Assembly: Combined spring rates shall be matched for each volume - regulator size with machined dashpot for stable operation. 2. Factory- calibrated and field - adjustable assembly with shaft extension for connection to externally mounted control actuator. E. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self - lubricating bearings. 1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3 -inch wg (750 -Pa) inlet static pressure. 2. Damper Position: Normally open. F. Hot -Water Heating Coil: Copper tube, mechanically expanded into aluminum -plate fins; leak tested underwater to 200 psig (1380 kPa); and factory installed. G. Electric Controls: Damper actuator and thermostat. s !f- C) - y Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, powered open. PART ))EXECUTION - o ALLATION CP Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. C. Install piping adjacent to air terminal units to allow service and maintenance. D. Hot -Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping," connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange. E. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts." AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233616-2 J t 1-1 0 n Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3.2 F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." ICO1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233616-3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 23 5216 — CONDENSING BOILERS PART 1 - GENERAL c/Ty /W 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Condensing hot water heating boilers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, controls, flue and breeching, and accessories for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show boiler layout and connections and complete flue system. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL requirements for listing. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 CLOSE- COUPLED, END - SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Aerco 2. Veissmann 3. Buderas B. Description: Furnish and install as shown on plans and operation and maintenance manuals, with all applicable codes and authorities having local, state and federal jurisdiction. The boiler CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project I IC01 plant shall consist of 2 hydronic boiler modules. Each boiler shall be; UL Listed, CSD -1 approved, ASME coded and stamped, and incorporate a gas train designed in accordance with FM. Each boiler shall have an input of 1,500mbh with a gross output of 1,290 to 1,408 mbh (dependent upon return water temperature) when fired with natural gas. The boiler manufacturer must publish known part load value efficiencies; the thermal efficiency must increase as the firing rate decreases. The accuracy of these published efficiencies must be reviewed & confirmed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Electrical service to each unit shall be 120V/1/6OHz 20 amp service. The boiler control panel shall be proprietary in design and incorporate the functions of temperature control, combustion safeguard control, message annunciation, and fault diagnostic display, on individual field replaceable circuit boards mounted within a single housing. Boiler controls shall be capable of communicating with and receiving inputs from a BACnet -based BAS. Coordinate requirements with the controls contractor. Each boiler shall have a footprint of no more than 28" W, 44.5 and 79" H with a UL Listing for zero side wall clearance. The boiler installed weight shall not exceed 1533 lbs. dry. The boiler shall have an ASME approved relief valve. C. Boiler Construction: Boiler modules shall be natural gas fired, condensing fire tube design with a modulating forced draft power burner and positive pressure vent discharge. 1. Modulating Air /Fuel Valve and Burner: The boiler burner shall be capable of a 20 to 1 turndown ratio of the firing rate without loss of combustion efficiency or staging of gas valves. The burner shall produce <30ppm of NOx corrected to 3% excess oxygen. The burner shall be metal fiber mesh covering a stainless steel body, with spark ignition and flame rectification. All burner material exposed to the combustion zone shall be of stainless steel construction. There shall be no moving parts within the burner itself. A modulating air /fuel valve shall meter the air and natural gas input. The modulating motor must be linked to both the gas valve body and air valve body with a single linkage. The linkage shall not require any field adjustment. A variable frequency drive (VFD) controlled cast aluminum pre -mix blower shall be utilized to ensure the optimum mixing of air & fuel between the air /fuel valve and the burner. 2. Pressure Vessel /Heat Exchanger: The boiler shall be capable of handling return water temperatures down to 40 F without any failure due to thermal shock or fireside condensation. The heat exchangers shall be ASME stamped for a working pressure not less than 160 psig. The pressure vessel shall have a maximum water volume of 27 gallons. The boiler water pressure drop shall not exceed 4.9 psig at 130 gpm. The boiler water connections shall be 3" flanged 150 lb. ANSI rated. The pressure vessels are constructed of SA53 carbon steel, with a 0.25" thick wall and 0.25 in. thick upper head. Inspection openings in the pressure vessels shall be in accordance with ASME Section IV pressure vessel code. The boiler shall be designed so that the thermal efficiency increases as the boiler firing rate decreases. The heat exchangers shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel fire tubes and tube sheets with a one -pass combustion gas flow design. The fire tubes shall be 5/8" OD with no less than 0.065" wall thickness. The upper and lower stainless steel tubesheets shall be no less than 0.375" thick. The pressure vessel /heat exchangers shall be welded construction. The heat exchangers shall be ASME stamped for a working pressure not less than 160 psig. Access to the tubesheets and heat exchangers are available by burner and exhaust manifold removal. Minimum access opening shall be no less than 8.3 in. diameter. 3. Exhaust Manifold: The exhaust manifold shall be of corrosion resistant stainless steel with a 6 "diameter flue connection. The exhaust manifold shall have a gravity drain for the elimination of the condensation with collecting reservoir. CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-2 t i n 0 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 2.3 BOILER CONTROLS IC01 A. The boiler control system shall be segregated into three components: Control Panel, Power Box, and Input/Output Connection Box. The entire system shall be Underwriters Laboratories Recognized. 1. The control panel shall consist of 6 individual circuit boards utilizing state -of- the -art surface -mount technology, in a single enclosure. These circuit boards shall be defined as follows: display board incorporating LED display to read temperature, and a VFD display module for all message annunciation; CPU board which houses all control functions; electric low water cutoff board with test and manual reset functions; power supply board; ignition /stepper board incorporating flame safeguard control; and connector board. Each board shall be individually field replaceable. The combustion safeguard /flame monitoring system shall utilize spark ignition and a rectification type flame sensor. The control panel hardware shall support both RS -232 and RS -485 remote communications. The controls shall annunciate boiler & sensor status and include extensive self- diagnostic capabilities that incorporate a minimum of 8 separate status messages and 34 separate fault messages. 2. The control panel shall incorporate three self - governing features designed to enhance operation in modes where it receives an external control signal by eliminating nuisance faults due to over - temperature, improper external signal or loss of external signal. These features are called: Setpoint High Limit, Setpoint Low Limit, and Failsafe Mode. Setpoint High Limit allows for a selectable maximum boiler outlet temperature and acts as temperature limiting governor. 3. It is a PID function that automatically limits firing rate to maintain outlet temperature within a 0 to10 degree selectable band from the desired maximum boiler outlet temperature. Setpoint Low Limit allows for a selectable minimum operating temperature. Failsafe Mode allows the boiler to switch its mode to operate from an internal setpoint if its external control signal is lost, rather than shut off. This is a selectable mode; hence the control can be set to shut off the unit upon loss of external signal if so desired. B. The boiler control system shall incorporate the following additional features for enhanced external system interface: 1. System start temperature feature 2. Pump delay timer 3. Auxiliary start delay timer 4. Auxiliary temperature sensor 5. mA output feature which allows for simple monitoring of either temperature setpoint, outlet temperature, or fire rate 6. Remote interlock circuit 7. Delayed interlock circuit 8. Fault relay for simple remote fault alarm. J C. Each boiler shall utilize an electric single seated combination safety shutoff val Q at ith proof of closure switch in its gas train and incorporate dual over - temperature manual reset in accordance with ASME Section IV and CSD -1. p otQ4ion t4h t- w PART 3 - EXECUTIONS 3.1 BOILER INSTALLATION A. All aspects of installation of Boiler Plant shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The vent system must conform to all manufacturer's recommendations and shall utilize UL listed stainless steel AL -294C Positive Pressure. The vent must be sized in `r accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Boiler plant piping shall be field constructed CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 of materials as specified. Each boiler shall have individually isolating shutoff valves for service and maintenance. Each boiler shall require a minimum gas pressure of 4.0" W.C. at 1,500 scfh (full load rated capacity). 3.2 FACTORY STARTUP A. Contractor shall provide the services of a local factory authorized representative to supervise all phases of equipment startup. A letter of compliance with all factory recommendations and installation instructions shall be submitted to the engineer with operation and maintenance instructions. PART 4 - WARRANTY 4.1 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. The pressure vessel /heat exchanger of the boiler shall carry a prorated 10 -year warranty against failure due to condensate corrosion, thermal stress, mechanical defects or workmanship. The control panel assembly shall carry a 2 year warranty against failure due to defective materials or workmanship. A Warranty Certificate must be issued to the owner from the manufacturer and a copy of warranty must be submitted for engineer's approval. END OF SECTION *T� Z' � � o t-� CONDENSING BOILERS 235216-4 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 23 6423 — AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Air cooled scroll water chillers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final pump, motor and impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. B. Shop Drawings: Show chiller layout and connections. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 (QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590, latest revision. C. Unit construction shall comply with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code, UL 1995, and ASME applicable codes. D. Unit shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001:2000 Manufacturing Quality Standard. E. Unit shall be full load run tested at the factory. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Unit controls shall be capable of withstanding 150 F (66 C) storage temperatures in the control compartment. B. Unit shall be stored and handled per unit manufacturer's recommendations. C. All piping and connections shall remain sealed from the factory to remain clean. AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS 236423-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FA 2.2 MANUFACTURERS IC01 In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 1 AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corporation. 2. Trane. 3. McQuay. B. Description: Microprocessor controlled, air - cooled liquid chiller utilizing scroll compressors, low sound fans and optional hydronic pump system. C. Chiller Construction: 1. General: Factory assembled, single -piece or factory- matched duplex chassis, air - cooled liquid chiller. Contained within the unit cabinet shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge (R-41 OA), and special features required prior to field start -up. 2. Unit Cabinet: a. Frame shall be of heavy -gage, painted galvanized steel. b. Cabinet shall be galvanized steel casing with a baked enamel powder or pre - painted finish. d' 00 h It C. Cabinet shall be capable of withstan mg 5 - our sa spray es in accor ance © with the ASTM (U.S.A.) B -117 standard. ::. Fans: a. Condenser fans shall be direct - driven, 9 -blade airfoil cross - section, reinforced *� ;-� polymer construction, shrouded -axial type, and shall be statically and dynamically ` balanced with inherent corrosion resistance. ti b. Air shall be discharged vertically upward. 0 � c. Fans shall be protected by coated steel wire safety guards. 4. (compressor /Compressor Assembly: op ° a. z Fully hermetic scroll type compressors. b. Direct drive, 3500 rpm (60 Hz), protected by motor temperature sensors, suction gas cooled motor. C. External vibration isolation rubber -in- shear. d. Each compressor shall be equipped with crankcase heaters to minimize oil dilution. 5. Cooler: a. Shell- and -tube type, direct expansion. b. Tubes shall be internally enhanced seamless copper type rolled into tube sheets. C. Shall be equipped with Victaulic -type fluid connections. d. Shell shall be insulated with 3 /4 -in. (19 -mm) PVC foam (closed -cell) with a maximum K factor of 0.28. e. Design shall incorporate a minimum of 2 independent direct - expansion refrigerant circuits. AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS 236423-2 C i n 0 POP im P" bw Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 Cooler shall be tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Code for a refrigerant working side pressure of 445 psig (3068 kPa). Cooler shall have a maximum fluid -side pressure of 300 psig (2068 kPa). 6. Condenser: a. Coil shall be air - cooled microchannel (MCHX) and shall have a series of flat tubes containing a series of multiple, parallel flow microchannels layered between the S t refrigerant manifolds. Microchannel coils shall consist of a two -pass arrangement. Coil construction shall consist of aluminum alloys for the fins, tubes and manifolds in combination with a corrosion - resistant coating on the tubes. b. Tubes shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed. ' C. Assembled condenser coils shall be leak tested and pressure tested at 656 psig (4522 kPa). 7. Refrigeration Components: Refrigerant circuit components shall include replaceable -core filter drier, moisture indicating sight glass, electronic expansion device, discharge service valve and liquid line service valves, and complete operating charge of both refrigerant R- ",,, 410A and compressor oil. 8. Controls, Safeties, and Diagnostics: a. Unit controls shall include the following minimum components: 1) Microprocessor with non - volatile memory. Battery backup system mall not be accepted. o 2) Separate terminal block for power and controls. 3) Control transformer to serve all controllers, relays, and contro*4 "nerd s. 4) ON /OFF control switch. 9 (.P 1' 5) Replaceable solid -state controllers. C� q• 6) Pressure sensors installed to measure suction and discharg'7iluid<. ur Thermistors installed to measure cooler entering and lea P" temperatures. b. Unit controls shall include the following functions: 1) Automatic circuit lead /lag. 2) Hermetic scroll compressors are maintenance free and protected by an auto - adaptive control that minimizes compressor wear. 3) Capacity control based on leaving chilled fluid temperature and compensated by rate of change of return -fluid temperature with temperature �^ set point accuracy to 0.1 ° F (0.06° C). 4) Limiting the chilled fluid temperature puildown rate at start -up to an adjustable range of 0.2° F to 2° F (0.11 ° C to 1.1 ° C) per minute to prevent excessive demand spikes at start -up. 5) Seven -day time schedule. 6) Leaving chilled fluid temperature reset from return fluid and outside air temperature. 7) Chilled water pump start/stop control and primary/standby sequencing to ensure equal pump run time. 8) Dual chiller control for parallel chiller applications without addition of hardware modules and control panels. a' 9) Timed maintenance scheduling to signal maintenance activities for pumps, strainer maintenance and user - defined maintenance activities. 10) Low ambient protection to energize cooler and hydronic system heaters. PM 11) Periodic pump start to ensure pump seals are properly maintained during off - season periods. 12) Single step demand limit control activated by remote contact closure. s• 13) Nighttime sound mode to reduce the sound of the machine by a user - defined schedule. C. Diagnostics: 1) The control panel shall include, as standard, a scrolling marquee display capable of indicating the safety lockout condition by displaying a code for l l� E AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS 236423-3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 1 IC01 which an explanation may be scrolled at the display with time and date AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS 236423-4 1� r J J l J i I stamp. 2) Information included for display shall be: a) Compressor lockout. b) Loss of charge. c) Low fluid flow. d) Cooler freeze protection. e) Cooler set point. f) Chilled water reset parameters. g) Thermistor and transducer malfunction. - h) Entering and leaving -fluid temperature. i) Evaporator and condenser pressure. Z j) System refrigerant temperatures. k) Chiller run hours. d 1) Compressor run hours. m) Compressor number of starts. O n) Time of day. o) Crankcase heater failure. d. Safeties: 1) Unit shall be equipped with thermistors and all necessary components in conjunction with the control system to provide the unit with the following protections: a) Loss of refrigerant charge. b) Reverse rotation. c) Low chilled fluid temperature. d) Thermal overload. e) High pressure. f) Electrical overload. g) Loss of phase. 2) Condenser fan and factory pump motors shall have external overcurrent protection. 9. Operating Characteristics: a. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at outdoor ambient temperatures from 32 F to 125 F (00 to 52 C) for all sizes. b. Unit shall be capable of starting up with 95 F (35 C) entering fluid temperature to the cooler. 10. Motors: Condenser -fan motors shall be totally enclosed single speed, 3 -phase type with permanently lubricated bearings and Class F insulation. 11. Electrical Requirements: a. Unit/module primary electrical power supply shall enter the unit at a single location. b. Unit shall operate on 3 -phase power at the voltage shown in the equipment schedule. C. Control points shall be accessed through terminal block. d. Unit shall be shipped with factory control and power wiring installed. 12. Chilled Water Circuit: a. Chilled water circuit shall be rated for 300 psig (2068 kPa). Units with optional pump package are rated for 150 psig (1034 kPa) working pressure. b. Thermal dispersion proof of flow switch shall be factory installed and wired. C. Optional hydronic package: 1) Field pipe connections shall be Victaulic type. 2) Primary/stand -by operation pump systems. Dual pump systems shall have a pump discharge check valve. 3) Pumps shall be single stage design, for installation in vertical position and capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. a) Pump casing shall be of class 30 cast iron. AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS 236423-4 1� r J J l J i I y Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 b) The impeller shall be of cast bronze, closed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by locking cap screw. c) The hydronic kit will be provided with a flush line connection to ensure lubrication at the seal face and allow for positive venting of the seal chamber. d) Each port shall be fitted with an isolation valve that allow the units to operate in parallel or standby, yet may be used to isolate one pumping unit for servicing or removal with the other pump still running. e) Pump shall be rated for 150 psig (1034 kPa) working pressure. f) The pump case shall have gage tappings at the suction and discharge nozzles and include drain ports. g) Dual pumps shall allow for the servicing of one pump without draining the chilled water loop. h) Motors shall totally enclosed 3 -phase type with grease lubricated ball bearings. i) Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute Standards. 4) Pressure /temperature taps (3) shall be factory installed to measure the pressure differential across the pump and across the strainer. 5) Combination valve shall be factory installed. Pressure /temperature taps (2) shall be factory installed to measure the pressure differential across the combination valve. 6) Hydronic assembly shall have factory supplied electric freeze protection to — 20 F ( -29 C). 7) Piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel. 8) Cast iron or ductile iron body strainer with 8 mesh screen. A factory- installed, removable fine mesh clean -out strainer for initial run period shall be included. 13. Special Features: a. Unit - Mounted Non -Fused Disconnect: Unit shall be supplied with factory- installed, non -fused electrical disconnect for main power supply. b. Minimum Load Control: Unit shall be equipped with factory (or field) installed, microprocessor - controlled, minimum load control that shall permit unit operation down to a minimum of 15% capacity. C. Hail Guards: Field- installed accessory kit shall include set of metal grilles for the protection of the condensing coils from hail damage. d. BACnetTm Translator Control: Unit shall be supplied with field - installed interface between the chiller and a BACnet Local Area Network (LAN, i.e., MS/TP EIA -485). e. Compressor Suction Service Valve: Standard refrigerant discharge isolation and liquid valves enable service personnel to store the refrigerant charge in the cooler or condenser during servicing. This factory- installed option allows for further isolation of the compressor from the cooler vessel. f. Low -Sound Compressor Enclosures: Provide sound reduction for the scroll compressors. PART 3 - EXECUTION CHILLER INSTALLATION Comply with all manufacturer's recommendations. r W C); Ln Install chiller with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, compressors, and accessories. AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS 236423-5 3.1 A. B. it CHILLER INSTALLATION Comply with all manufacturer's recommendations. r W C); Ln Install chiller with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, compressors, and accessories. AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS 236423-5 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 C. Support chiller on spring vibration isolators to prevent vibration from transmitting into the building. D. Set chillers on steel structure level and plumb. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. E. Install triple -duty valve on discharge side of pumps. F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of chiller. H. Install pressure gages on chiller inlet and discharge, at integral pressure -gage tapping. I. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding." J. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FACTORY STARTUP A. Factory- authorized service technician shall perform startup of chiller. Technician shall inspect installation prior to startup and perform all startup tasks as indicated in the installation and operation manual. PART 4 - WARRANTY 4.1 WARRANTY A. Compressors shall be provided with 5 -year parts warranty. All other components shall have 1- year standard parts and labor. END OF SECTION AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS 236423-6 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 23 7313 — AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Indoor, modular central station air - handling units. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final motor characteristics, dimensions, and ac *sories for each type of product indicated. Indicate fan's operating point on curves. B. Shop Drawings: Show AHU layout and connections. 7 C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum of five years documented experience. B. Units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001:2000 manufacturing quality standard. C. Air - handling unit assembly shall have UL 1995 certification for safety. D. Products requiring electric connection shall be listed and classified by ETL and CSA as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. E. Coil performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. F. Air - handling unit shall be ARI 430 listed and meet NFPA 90A requirements. FR 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All indoor units, painted or unpainted, shall be completely shrink- wrapped from the factory for protection during shipment. Tarping of bare units is unacceptable. B. Inspect for transportation damage and store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. �r e�•+ AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 A MANUFACTURERS IC01 In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. INDOOR MODULAR AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corporation. 2. Trane. 3. McQuay. B. Description: 1. Units shall ship in the number of sections necessary to meet project requirements and shall ship in as many splits as specified in selection software and as are required to rig equipment into place. 2. Unit shall be factory- supplied, central station air handler. The air - handling unit may consist of a fan with the following factory- installed components as indicated on the 1. Unit shall be constructed of a complete frame with easily removable panels. Removal of any panel shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Single height coil sections shall have removable frame sections to facilitate vertical coil extraction. 2. All units shall be supplied with 16 -gage, G -90 galvanized steel base rails. Bolt -on legs are NOT acceptable. Perimeter 10 -gage lifting lugs for overhead lifting shall be provided on each section. Slinging units in place of lifting lugs shall not be acceptable. 3. Unit shall be thermally broken to minimize the conduction path from the inside of the casing to the outside. 4. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be constructed of galvanized steel, and shall have one of the following exterior finishes as specified: a. Unpainted G -90 galvanized steel. 5. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be constructed of galvanized steel, and shall have one of the following interior finishes as specified: AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-2 CI! C] equipment schedule. a. Mixing Box Section: With angle filter tracks. b. Plenum Section: With drain pan. 0 4 c. Coil Section: 1) Chilled water coil. r� ac 2) Hot water coil. 1 =, i� d. Fan Section: •� M —~ U 1) Horizontal draw -thru. 2) Vertical draw -thru. 11- U .dL O Caging: 1. Unit shall be constructed of a complete frame with easily removable panels. Removal of any panel shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Single height coil sections shall have removable frame sections to facilitate vertical coil extraction. 2. All units shall be supplied with 16 -gage, G -90 galvanized steel base rails. Bolt -on legs are NOT acceptable. Perimeter 10 -gage lifting lugs for overhead lifting shall be provided on each section. Slinging units in place of lifting lugs shall not be acceptable. 3. Unit shall be thermally broken to minimize the conduction path from the inside of the casing to the outside. 4. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be constructed of galvanized steel, and shall have one of the following exterior finishes as specified: a. Unpainted G -90 galvanized steel. 5. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be constructed of galvanized steel, and shall have one of the following interior finishes as specified: AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-2 CI! C] Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 bw a. Pre - coated with a silver zeolite antimicrobial material registered by the US EPA for ,., use in HVAC applications. 6. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall have no exterior exposed raw edges that could lead to rust formation. All casing corners shall be radiused or chamfered. 7. Casing panels (top, sides, and bottom) shall be one piece, double -wall construction with insulation sealed between the inner and outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an R -value of less than 13. 8. Casing deflection shall not exceed a 1:200 ratio when subject to an internal pressure of t Iwo 5 -in. wg. 9. Side panels shall be easily removable for access to unit and shall seal against a full perimeter automotive style gasket to ensure a tight seal. 10. The panel retention system shall comply with UL 1995 which states all moving parts (for example, fan blades, blower wheels, pulleys, and belts) that, if accidentally contacted, could cause bodily injury, shall be guarded against accidental contact by an enclosure requiring tools for removal. 11. Accessibility options shall be as follows: a. Hinged double -wall access door on either side with removable access panel(s) on the other side. 12. Fan supports, structural members, panels, or flooring shall not be welded, unless aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion - resistant material is used. Painted welds on unit exterior steel or galvanized steel are not acceptable. 13. All coil sections shall be doublewall construction with insulation sealed between the inner and outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an R -value of less than 13. Single height coil sections shall have removable frame sections to facilitate vertical coil extraction. D. Access Doors: Access doors shall be one piece, double -wall construction with insulation sealed between the inner and outer panels. Panel assemblies shall not carry an R -value of less than 13. E. Drain Pans: Drain pans shall be insulated double -wall galvanized or stainless steel construction. The pan shall be sloped in 4 directions toward the drain fitting. Drain pan shall have a recessed bottom drain design with 11/2 -in. MPT connection exiting through the hand side or opposite side of the casing as specified. Drain connection shall be insulated from the drain pan to the point at which it exits the casing. One drain outlet shall be supplied for each cooling coil section. Drain pan shall allow no standing water and comply with ASHRAE Standard 62. Where 2 q�more coils are stacked in a coil bank, intermediate drain pans shall be provided and condom sate shall be piped to the bottom drain pan. The bottom coil shall not serve as a drp4th fthe upper coil. T, � =' F. Fans: 0 1. General: a. Forward- curved fans shall have one doublewidth double -inlet (DW DI,O nrhe _ i and scroll. They shall be constructed of galvanized steel with baked enirmel. Th shall be designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan STeed ane motor horsepower. Fans shall have an AMCA class rating corresponding to the static pressure at which the fan is designed to operate (Class I or II). Completed fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced in accordance with 1989 ARI Guideline G and ANSI S2.19- 1986 at design operating speed using contract drive and motor if ordered. b. Airfoil fan sections shall have one DWDI airfoil fan wheel and scroll. Airfoil blades shall be double thickness design constructed of heavy gage, high strength steel or aluminum continuously welded to the backplate and the spun inlet flange. Entire fan assembly shall be cleaned, primed and painted with alkyd enamel, except for an aluminum fan wheel when supplied. Fans shall have an AMCA class rating AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313 -3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project wn C) t. ce) G. C. e. i� U 2. 3. 4 6. IC01 corresponding to the static pressure at which the fan is designed to operate (Class I, II, or III). Completed fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced to minimum grade of G 6.3 per ANSI /AMCA 204 -96 at design operating speed using contract drive and motor if ordered. Plenum fan sections shall have one single -width single -inlet (SWSI) airfoil fan wheel. Airfoil blades shall be double thickness design constructed of heavy gage, high strength steel or aluminum continuously welded to the backplate and the spun inlet flange. Entire fan assembly shall be cleaned, primed and painted with alkyd enamel, except for an aluminum fan wheel when supplied. They shall be designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fans shall have an AMCA class rating corresponding to the static pressure at which the fan is designed to operate (Class I, II, or III). Completed fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced to minimum grade of G 6.3 per ANSI /AMCA 204 -96 at design operating speed using contract drive and motor if ordered. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be designed for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheels and shafts shall be selected with a maximum operating speed 25% below the first critical. Fan shafts shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished and coated with a rust inhibitor. Fan motor shall be mounted within the fan section casing on slide rails equipped with adjusting screws. Motor shall be high efficiency, open dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled NEMA Design B with size and electrical characteristics as shown on the equipment schedule. Premium efficiency motors shall be available. Motor shall be mounted on a horizontal flat surface and shall not be supported by the fan or its structural members. All three -phase motors shall have a t 10% voltage utilization range and a 1.15 minimum service factor. Motor shall be compliant with EPACT where applicable. Performance Ratings: Fan performance shall be rated and certified in accordance with ARI Standard 430. Sound Ratings: Manufacturer shall submit first through eighth octave sound power for fan discharge and casing radiated sound. Mounting: Fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, drives, and motor shall be mounted on a common base assembly. The base assembly is isolated from the outer casing with factory- installed isolators and rubber vibration absorbent fan discharge seal. A canvas style duct connection between fan discharge and cabinet is not acceptable. Units shall use 2 -in. deflection spring isolators. Fan Accessories: a. Variable frequency drives with bypass. b. Magnetic motor starters. C. Motor disconnects. d. Belt guards. e. Inlet screen. Flexible Connection: The base assembly is isolated from the outer casing with factory- installed isolators and rubber vibration absorbent fan discharge seal. A canvas style duct connection between fan discharge and cabinet is not acceptable. Bearings And Drives 1. Bearings: Self- aligning, grease lubricated, anti - friction with lubrication fittings extended to drive side of fan section. Forward - curved fans: Cartridge type bearings for Class I fans. Heavy -duty pillow block type, self - aligning, regreasable ball or roller type bearings selected for a minimum average life (L50) of 200,000 hours or optionally for an (L50) of 500,000 hours. AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313 -4 n 1 9 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 b. Airfoil fans: Heavy -duty pillow block type, self - aligning, regreasable ball or roller type bearings selected for a minimum average life (L50) of 200,000 hours or optionally for an (L50) of 500,000 hours. C. Plenum fans: Heavy -duty pillow block type, self - aligning, regreasable roller type bearings selected for a minimum average life (L50) of 200,000 hours or optionally for an (L50) of 500,000 hours. 2. Shafts: Fan shafts shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished and coated with a rust inhibitor. 3. V -Belt Drive: Drive shall be designed for a minimum 1.2 service factor and a factory - supplied extra set of belts. Drives shall be fixed pitch with optional variable pitch for motors 15 hp and less. All drives shall be factory mounted, with sheaves aligned and belts properly tensioned. H. Coils 1. All water coils shall be provided to meet the scheduled performance. All coil performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. All water coils shall be tested at 450 psig air pressure. 2. General Fabrication: a. All water coils shall have minimum 1 /2 -in. OD copper tubes mechanically expanded into fins to ensure high thermal performance with lower total flow and pumping requirements. Minimum tube wall thickness shall be 0.025 inches. b. Aluminum plate fin type with belled collars. C. Aluminum- finned coils shall be supplied with dieformed casing and tube sheets of mill galvanized steel. 3. Hydronic Heating and Cooling Coils: a. Headers shall be constructed of steel with steel MPT connections. Headers shall have drain and vent connections accessible from the exterior of the unit. b. Configuration: Coils shall be drainable, with non - trapping circuits. Coils will be suitable for a design working pressure of 300 psig at 200 F. I. Filter Sections 1. Angle filter sections shall accept either 2 -in. or 4 -in. filters of standard sizes, arranged in a horizontal V formation. 2. Magnehelic Gages: a. Housing shall be constructed of a die cast aluminum case and bezel with acrylic cover. Exterior finish shall be coated gray to withstand 168 hr salt spray corrosion test. b. Accuracy shall be t2% of full scale throughout range at 70 F (21.1 C). C. Pressure limits shall be -20 in. Hg to 15 psig (0.677 bar to 1.034 PC- d. Overpressure relief plugs shall open at approximately 25 .72Pa) Temperature limits shall be 20 to 140 F ( -6.67 to 60 C). r % e. Diameter of dial face shall be 4 in. (101.6 mm). j OD f. Process connections shall be 1 /8 -in. female NPT duplicate high andfresre taps — one pair side and one pair back. _ r J. Dampers 0 1. Mixing boxes, filter- mixing boxes, and exhaust boxes shall have parallel or opposed blades and interconnecting outside -air and return -air dampers. Damper blades shall be constructed of galvanized steel with a double -skin airfoil design, with blade seals and stainless steel jamb seals. Blades shall be mechanically fastened to axle rods rotating in self - lubricating synthetic bearings. Maximum leakage rate shall be 2 cfm /ft2 at 1 in. wg (0.25 kPa) differential pressure. K. Electrical Accessories AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-5 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 Disconnects: 200 -230 volt/3 -phase fused and non -fused disconnects shall have the following characteristics: a. Visible blades. b. Quick -make, quick -break operating mechanism. C. Cover padlock hasp and handle lock "OFF." I r d. 240 vac maximum. ' e. Up to 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes SCCR, utilizing appropriately rated, factory- supplied Class R fuses. f. Horsepower rated for motor applications. g. Tangential combination knockouts for field wiring. h. Spring reinforced plated copper fuse clips. i. NEMA type 1 enclosures. j. Insulated, bondable solid neutral assemblies. k. UL listed, File E2875. 1. Meet or exceed NEMA KS1 -1990. 2. Bypass for Variable Frequency Drives: a. 200 -230 v/3 Ph /60 Hz (1 to 7.5 Hp) 1) 4- position panel- mounted disconnect style switch with lockable handle (locks not provided), meets OSHA 1910. 2) Switch position indication (LINE /OFF /DRIVE/TEST). 3) Adjustable motor overload with trip indication (LINE position). 4) Manual overload reset button. 5) Horsepower rated for motor applications. >a 6) Direct control (no contactors, relays, or holding coils). 7) Complete isolation of inverter in LINE position. 8) NEMA 12 type metal enclosures. 9) Terminal strip provided for field power supply wiring. y ce) ' 10) Lug connection for field ground wire. r 11) Gold flashed, auxiliary switch contact set (for switch position monitoring). Zj 12) Factory mounted, wired to VFD and motor, and run tested. 13) UL listed. b. 200 -230 v/3 Ph /60 Hz (10 to 75 Hp) 1) 4- position panel- mounted disconnect style switch with lockable handle (locks not provided), meets OSHA 1910. 2) Switch position indication (LINE /OFF /DRIVE/TEST). 3) Adjustable motor overload with trip indication (in LINE position). 4) Manual overload reset button. 5) Horsepower rated for motor applications. 6) 115 -v control transformer with fused secondary. 7) Contactor for Line Start/Stop. 8) Door - mounted Line Start and Line Stop pushbuttons. 9) Complete isolation of inverter in LINE position. 10) NEMA 12 type metal enclosures. 11) Terminal strip provided for field power supply wiring. 12) Lug connection for field ground wire. 13) Gold flashed, auxiliary switch contact set (for switch position monitoring). 14) Factory mounted, wired to VFD and motor, and run tested. 15) UL listed. 3. Variable Frequency Drives: a. Factory- mounted variable frequency drives (VFDs) shall be wired to factory- supplied motors. AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-6 u 1� h Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 0- IC01 AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-7 b. Factory- supplied VFDs are programmed and started up from the factory and qualify the VFD, through the manufacturer, for a 24 -month warranty from date of commissioning or 30 months from date of sale, whichever occurs first. C. The VFD parameters are programmed into the controller and removable keypad. In the event that the VFD fails and needs replacement, the program can then be uploaded to the replacement VFD via the original keypad. d. The VFD package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL Listed Type 1 enclosure, completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer in a facility registered to ISO 9001:2000. The VFD tolerated voltage window shall allow the VFD to operate from a line of +30% nominal, and -35% nominal voltage as a minimum. 1) Environmental operating conditions: 00 to 40 C continuous. Variable frequency drives that can operate at 40 C intermittently (during a 24 -hour it period) are not acceptable and must be oversized. Altitude 0 to 3300 feet above sea level, less than 95% humidity, non - condensing. 2) Enclosure shall be rated UL type 1 and shall be UL listed as a plenum rated VFD. Variable frequency drives without these ratings are not acceptable. e. All VFDs shall have the following standard features: „�. 1) All VFDs shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad, regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for start -up of multiple VFDs. 2) The keypad shall include Hand - Off -Auto selections and manual speed control. The drive shall incorporate "bumpless transfer" of speed reference when switching between "Hand" and "Auto" modes. There shall be fault ,., reset and "Help" buttons on the keypad. The Help button shall include "on- line" assistance for programming and troubleshooting. 3) There shall be a built -in timeclock in the VFD keypad. The clock shall have a battery back up with 10 years minimum life span. The clock shall be used to date and time stamp faults and record operating parameters at the time of 60 fault. If the battery fails, the VFD shall automatically revert to hours of operation since initial power up. The clock shall also be programmable to ,�• control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter sets and output relays. The VFD shall have a digital input that allows an override to the time clock (when in the off mode) for a programmable time frame. There shall be four (4) separate, independent timer functions that have both weekday and weekend settings. 4) The VFDs shall utilize pre - programmed application macros specifically designed to facilitate start -up. The Application Macros shall provide one • command to reprogram all parameters and customer interfaces for a particular application to reduce programming time. The VFD shall have two user macros to allow the end -user to create and save custom settings. 5) The VFD shall have cooling fans that are designed for easy replacement. The fans shall be designed for replacement without requiring removing the ir. VFD from the wall or removal of circuit boards. The VFD cooling fans shall operate only when required. To extend the fan and bearing operaf life, operating temperature will be monitored and used to cycle fans an and off as required. o} 5;; . -n 6) The VFD shall be capable of starting into a coasting lo— M__.Rorw9ffi or reverse) up to full speed and accelerate or decelerate to satpoint w�out safety tripping or component damage (flying start). '" 0 7) The VFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an rcu nt, over - voltage, under - voltage, or loss of input signal proteciip. die number of restart attempts, trial time, and time between atterr*s shalae programmable. Z' c.n AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-7 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 8) The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes, 130% overload for 2 seconds. The minimum FLA rating shall meet or exceed the values in the NEC/ UL table 430 -150 for 4 -pole motors. 9) The VFD shall have an integral 5% impedance line reactors to reduce the harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients. The 5% impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus) reactors, or 5% AC line reactors. Variable frequency drives with only one DC reactor shall add AC line reactors. 10) The VFD shall include a coordinated AC transient protection system consisting of four 120 -joule rated MOVs (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and 5% impedance reactors. 11) The VFD shall be capable of sensing a loss of load (broken belt or broken coupling) and signal the loss of load condition. The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/ or over the serial communications bus. Relay outputs shall include programmable time delays that will allow for drive acceleration from zero speed without signaling a false underload condition. 12) If the input reference (4 to 20 mA or 2 to 10 v) is lost, the VFD shall give the user the option of either (1) stopping and displaying a fault, (2) running at a programmable preset speed, (3) holding the VFD speed based on the last good reference received, or (4) causing a warning to be issued, as selected U-) Q by the user. The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via a o keypad warning, relay output and /or over the serial communication bus. 13) The VFD shall have programmable "Sleep" and "Wake up" functions to allow C3 the drive to be started and stopped from the level of a process feedback C_) ¢ signal. M V f. All VFDs to have the following adjustments: or- 1) Three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the CD " :LL.. 5 VFD from operating the load continuously at an unstable speed. 3 Q 2) Two (2) PID set point controllers shall be standard in the drive, allowing e pressure or flow signals to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed loop control. The VFD shall have 250 mA of 24 vdc auxiliary power and be capable of loop powering a transmitter supplied by others. The PID set point shall be adjustable from the VFD keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications bus. There shall be two parameter sets for the first PID that allow the sets to be switched via a digital input, serial communications or from the keypad for night setback, summer /winter set points, etc. There shall be an independent, second PID loop that can utilize the second analog input and modulate one of the analog outputs to maintain set point of an independent process (i.e,. valves, dampers, etc.). All set points, process variables, etc. shall be accessible from the serial communication network. The set points shall be set in Engineering units and not require a percentage of the transducer input. 3) Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept current or voltage signals. 4) Two (2) programmable analog outputs (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 rnA). The outputs may be programmed to output proportional to Frequency, Motor Speed, Output Voltage, Output Current, Motor Torque, Motor Power (kW), DC Bus voltage, Active Reference, and other data. 5) Six (6) programmable digital inputs for maximum flexibility in interfacing with external devices, typically programmed as follows: There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, input contact closure, timeclock control, or serial communications) the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-8 LII f� its+ Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-9 the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end- switch) shall close. The closed end- switch is wired to a VFD digital input and allows VFD motor operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop, and the damper *" shall be commanded to close. The keypad shall display "start enable 1 (or 2) j„ missing." The safety status shall also be transmitted over the serial communications bus. All digital inputs shall be programmable to initiate M" upon an application or removal of 24 vdc. 6) Three (3) programmable digital Form -C relay outputs. The relays shall include programmable on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis. Default settings shall be for run, not faulted (fail safe), and run permissive. The relays shall be rated for maximum switching current 8 amps at 24 vdc and 0.4 A at 250 vac; Maximum voltage 300 vdc and 250 vac; continuous current rating 2 amps RMS. Outputs shall be true Form C type contacts; ,�. open collector outputs are not acceptable. 7) Seven (7) programmable preset speeds. 8) Two independently adjustable accelerate and decelerate ramps with 1 to 1800 seconds adjustable time ramps. 9) The VFD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically iwr reduce applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and audible motor noise. �* 10) The VFD shall include a carrier frequency control circuit that reduces the carrier frequency based on actual VFD temperature that allows the highest taw carrier frequency without derating the VFD or operating at high carrier frequency only at low speeds. 11) The VFD shall include password protection against parameter changes. I'■' g. The keypad shall include a backlit LCD display. The display shall be in complete English words for programming and fault diagnostics (alphanumeric codes are not acceptable). The keypad shall utilize the following assistants: 1) Start-up assistants. 2) Parameter assistants. a� 3) Maintenance assistant. 4) Troubleshooting assistant. h. All applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering (user) units. A minimum of three operating values from the list below shall be capable of being displayed at all times. The display shall be in complete 991glish • words (alphanumeric codes are not acceptable): 1) Output Frequency -C� 2) Motor Speed (rpm, percentage, or Engineering units) r Irr 3) Motor Current w 4) Calculated Motor Torque 4 5) Calculated Motor Power (kW) _ 6) DC Bus Voltage 7) Output Voltage ,., i. The VFD shall include a fireman's override input. Upon receipt of a contact cloFure from the fireman's control station, the VFD shall operate at an adjustable preset speed. The mode shall override all other inputs (analog /digital, serial communication, and all keypad commands) and force the motor to run at the adjustable, preset speed. "Override Mode" shall be displayed on the keypad. Upon removal of the override signal, the VFD shall resume normal operation. j. Serial Communications: 1) The VFD shall have an RS -485 port as standard. The standard protocol shall be BACnetTM. Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-9 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 VFD. The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be "certified" by the governing authority. Use of non - certified protocols is not allowed. 2) Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to: run - stop control, speed set adjustment, proportional /integral /derivative (PID) control adjustments, current limit, accelerate /decelerate time adjustments, and lock and unlock the keypad. The drive shall have the capability of to allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as process variable feedback, Q output speed /frequency, current (in amps), percent torque, power (kW), kilowatt -hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drive �= temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the VFD relay output status, digital input status, and all analog input and analog output values. All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over r U the serial communications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible. U < The following additional status indications and settings shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus — keypad "Hand" or "Auto" selected, Q bypass selected, the ability to change the PID set point, and the ability to force the unit to bypass (if bypass is specified). The DDC system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running in the VFD mode or bypass mode (if bypass is specified) over serial communications. A minimum of 15 field parameters shall be capable of being monitored. 3) The VFD shall allow the DDC to control the drive's digital and analog outputs via the serial interface. This control shall be independent of any VFD function. For example, the analog outputs may be used for modulating chilled water valves or cooling tower bypass valves. The drive's digital (relay) outputs may be used to actuate a damper, open a valve or control any other device that requires a maintained contact for operation. In addition, all of the drive's digital and analog inputs shall be capable of being monitored by the DDC system. 4) The VFD shall include an independent PID loop for customer use. The independent PID loop may be used for cooling tower bypass value control, chilled water value control, etc. Both the VFD control PID loop and the independent PID loop shall continue functioning even if the serial communications connection is lost. The VFD shall keep the last good set point command and last good digital output (DO) and analog output (AO) commands in memory in the event the serial communications connection is lost. k. EMI /RFI Filters: All VFDs shall include EMI /RFI filters. The onboard filters shall allow the VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800 -3 for the First Environment restricted level. 1. All VFDs through 50 hp shall be protected from input and output power miswiring. The VFD shall sense this condition and display an alarm on the keypad. M. Operational Functions: 1) The drive shall contain two separate acceleration/ deceleration times with auto tuning for optimum setting (0.1 to 6000 seconds) with choice of linear, S, or C curves that shall be factory programmed to match the fan load and prevent nuisance overcurrent fault trips. 2) The drive shall be equipped with both local /remote and manual /auto keys on touchpad. 3) The drive shall be equipped with a quick setup key. 4) The drive shall contain 15 preset speeds, which can be activated from the keypad, terminal inputs, and host computer. 5) The drive shall have the capability of storable special custom user setting. 6) The drive shall restart into a rotating motor operating in either the forward or reverse direction and match that frequency. AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-10 i'l u I i AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-11 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 7) The drive shall have adjustable soft stall (10% to 150 %) which reduces frequency and voltage of the inverter to sustain a run in an overload situation factory programmed for each motor's characteristics. 8) The drive shall be capable of performing a time base pattern run using 4 groups of 8 patterns each using the 15 preset speed values for a maximum of 32 different patterns. w 9) The drive shall have adjustable UL listed electronic overload protection (10% to 100 %) factory programmed to match each motor's FLA/RLA ratings. 10) The drive shall have a custom programmable volt/hertz pattern. n. Protective Features: 1) The drive shall be rated for 200,000 AIC (ampere interrupting capacity). The use of input fuses to achieve this rating shall not be acceptable. 2) The drive shall have external fault input. 3) The drive shall be capable of resetting faults remotely and locally. 4) The drive shall be programmable to alert the following alarms: rr► a) Over torque alarm. b) Inverter overload pre - alarm. c) Motor overload pre - alarm. d) Braking resistor overload pre - alarm. e) Inverter overheat pre - alarm. f) Undercurrent alarm. g) Overcurrent pre - alarm. ism h) Communication error alarm. i) Cumulative timer alarm. j) Executing retry. " 5) The drive shall identify and display the following faults: a) Overcurrent during acceleration, deceleration or normal run trip. b) Overcurrent on the DC bus during acceleration, deceleration or normal run trip. c) Load end overcurrent trip detected at start-up (output terminals, motor �• wiring, etc.). Lo d) U -, V -, or W -phase short circuit trip detected at start-up. e) Overvoltage during acceleration, deceleration or normal run trip. f) Inverter or motor overloaded trip. g) Inverter overheat trip. h) Emergency off trip message. � i) EEPROM failure during write or initial read cycle. _ j) RAM, ROM, or CPU error. W k) Communication interruption error. -'Crt 1) Gate array error. P" m) Output current detection circuit error. 6 n) Option PCB error trip._ o) Low operating current trip. p) Main circuit under voltage trip. - q) Over torque trip. y r) Software or hardware detected earth fault trip. S) Inverter or EEPROM type form mismatch error. - 6) Monitor Functions: a) The drive digital display shall be capable of displaying the following: Frequency, percent current, current amps, percent voltage 1 /0, voltage in volts 1 /0, RPM, GPM, 1/0 watts, torque, and input reference signal, kWh. AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-11 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to coils. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to coils. D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of coil manifold size. E. Install flexible connectors on ductwork and piping connections to the AHUs. F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding." G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." H. Controls contractor to furnish and install all controls, sensors, and actuators required to achieve complete control of all AHU functions. Interface with VFD will be via BACnet interface. AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-12 b) The drive shall have 320 programmable parameters which can be changed while the drive is operating. c) The drive's 353 parameters shall be adjustable from the 8 -key touchpad or computer link. d) The drive's 8 -key touchpad shall be NEMA 12 rated. �LO e) The drive's keypad shall be capable of being extended 15 ft from the Q drive. fl The drive shall contain a reset of all parameters to factory default settings or user defaults (whichever one is chosen). g) The drive shall have 2 programmable analog outputs programmable LL- to 17 choices. _ h) The drive shall have one programmable relay output programmable C-? t- to 67 choices. CI -a CD i) The drive shall have 8 programmable digital inputs programmable to 54 choices. j) The drive shall have a pulse train output proportional to frequency (48, 96, 360 times frequency). k) The drive shall have an elapsed time meter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 AHU INSTALLATION A. Comply with all manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install AHU with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, fan wheels, couplings, coils, drives, and accessories. C. Set AHU's on steel base rails level and plumb. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to coils. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to coils. D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of coil manifold size. E. Install flexible connectors on ductwork and piping connections to the AHUs. F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding." G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." H. Controls contractor to furnish and install all controls, sensors, and actuators required to achieve complete control of all AHU functions. Interface with VFD will be via BACnet interface. AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-12 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 3.3 FACTORY STARTUP A. Factory- authorized service technician shall perform startup of AHU. Technician shall inspect installation prior to startup and perform all startup tasks as indicated in the installation and operation manual. PART 4 - WARRANTY 4.1 WARRANTY A. All components shall have 1 -year standard parts and labor warranty. END OF SECTION p � t r AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-13 rrr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 260100 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 INTRODUCTION A. Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern all work under this section. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT IC01 A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work as specified in the individual Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ' �A 5 A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and /or existing record documents. Report discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with the User Agency, Architect, and Engineer. Also, if applicable, coordinate utility service outages with the local Utility Company. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experience in such operations. In particular, all security and safety systems must be maintained in operation at all times as required by the OWNER. This includes security and safety lighting. D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the OWNER and ARCHITECT /ENGINEER at least 48 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. If required, make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the OWNER, ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 260100 -1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project I IC01 ARCHITECT /ENGINEER and local Authority Having Jurisdiction at least 48 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. If required, make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. E. Existing Communication /Data System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the OWNER, ARCHITECT /ENGINEER and local Telephone Utility. If required, make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work to meet all requirements of these specifications. B. If certain raceways and boxes are abandoned but not scheduled for removal, those items must be shown on the "As Built Drawings ". C. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. D. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. E. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. F. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. I. Maintain access to existing electrical installations, which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. This includes the extension of the circuit from the last active device to the next device in the system to be activated. 3.06 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. QE—.'anelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace -/ damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit 0 -- directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. :.) N CO END OF SECTION i° fie, a c ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 260100 -2 C I 1 oft N Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 260126 — MAINTENANCE AND TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE IC01 A. This section shall provide the required cleaning, repair, adjustment, calibration, maintenance and testing, as specified herein. This applies only to new electrical and existing electrical equipment being furnished, modified, worked on or serviced by this contractor for this project. PART 2- PRODUCTS D NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION_' i 3.01 GENERAL INSPECTION AND CLEANING OF ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT y A. Inspect for physical damage and abnormal mechanical and electrical conditions. B. Any item found to be out of tolerance, or in any other way defective as a result of the required testing, shall be reported to the arch itect/engineer. Procedure for repair and /or replacement will be outlined. After appropriate corrective action is completed, the item shall be re- tested. C. Compare equipment nameplate information with the latest single line diagram and report any discrepancies. D. Verify proper auxiliary device operation and indicators. E. Check tightness of accessible bolted electrical joints. Use torque wrench method. F. Make a close examination of equipment and remove any shipping brackets, insulation, packing, etc. that may not have been removed during original installation. G. Make a close examination of equipment and remove any dirt or other forms of debris that may have collected in existing equipment or in new equipment during installation. H. Clean All Equipment: 1. Vacuum inside of panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, transformer core and coils, horizontal and vertical busducts, MCC's, fire alarm panels, comm. /data, security panel, etc. 2. Loosen attached particles and vacuum them away. 3. Wipe all insulators with a clean, dry, lint free rag. 4. Clean insulator grooves. 5. Re- vacuum inside surfaces as directed by the Architect /Engineer or Inspector F" I. Inspect equipment anchorage. * MAINTENANCE AND TESTING 260126 -1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project lC01 J. Inspect equipment and bus alignment. K. Check all heater elements for operation and control. L. Lubricate nonelectrical equipment per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 CABLES A. Visual and Mechanical Inspections: 1. Inspect exposed sections for physical damage. 2. Verify cable is supplied and connected in accordance with panel schedule. 3. Inspect for shield grounding, cable support and termination. 4. Inspect for visual jacket and insulation condition. 5. Visible cable bends shall be checked against ICEA or manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radii -- 12 times the diameter for tape shielded cables. 6. Inspect for proper fireproofing in common cable areas. 7. There shall be NO tests performed on existing cable without specific direction from the Consulting Engineer. B. Electrical Tests -- Below 600 Volts: 1. Visually inspect cables, lugs, connectors and all other components for physical damage and proper connections 2. Check all cable connectors for tightness (with a torque wrench) and clearances. Torque test conductor and bus terminations to manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Check for proper grounding resistance at all services and at transformers. Resistance shall be 2 ohms maximum. END OF SECTION 4 MAINTENANCE AND TESTING 260126 -2 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 260500 - BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS I C01 A. The Contractors attention is hereby directed to the CONTRACT and GENERAL CONDITIONS that are hereby made part of this section of this Division of the Specifications. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All references in this Division of the specifications to the "Contractor" or to the "Electrical Contractor" refer to the specific contractor bidding all work indicated, listed or otherwise defined under "Division 26 XX XX, Electrical" of the specifications and on the associated Electrical drawings. B. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all classes of work shown on the drawings and specified under Division 26 XX XX, unless it is specifically stated that it shall be accomplished by others C. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall be equally bound by the Instructions to Bidders, Bid Agreement, Bond forms, Addenda, General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions as previously stated. D. The Plans and Specifications are intended to cover a complete electrical system. The "^ Contractor shall provide all items, articles, materials, operations, methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the drawings and herein specified including all labor, equipment and incidentals necessary and required for its completion. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the electrical system work of this Division and without limiting generality thereof consists of furnishing labor, materials, equipment, hoisting, plant, transportation, rigging, staging, appurtenances, and „�. services necessary and /or incidental to properly complete all electric work as shown on Drawings, as described in Specifications or as reasonably inferred from either C-J,5 -being Muired in opinion of Architect. 0 'x' 1.04 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT W A. Provide materials and equipment necessary to make installation complete in evei3k imtail lAder -� this Contract whether or not specifically shown on Drawings or specified herein. B. Proposals shall be based on the specified products as follows: CT' s: 1. If the specified manufacturer's product is indicated with no additional comment, the it specific product is to be provided. 2. The Architect reserves the right to refuse approval if the product selected by the contractor is not equivalent (in the opinion of the Arch itect/Engineer) to the listed product. t BASIC METHODS AND REQtIREMENTS ,, 260500 -1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 C. If a specific manufacturer's product is indicated with additional manufacturers named, the choice of the named manufacturer's equivalent products is optional with the Contractor. D. All materials are subject to approval by the Architect both before and after incorporation in the building. Contractor shall be responsible that any substitutions fit the space allotted, where space will limit the selection of equipment in any way. E. The Architect reserves the right to refuse approval on equipment which does not meet the Specifications in his opinion, or on equipment for which no local experience of satisfactory service is available. F. Submit comprehensive descriptive and technical data to establish quality. Do not submit for substitution of material or equipment unless identical material or equipment has been operated successfully for at least three consecutive years. G. All materials shall be new and a standard catalog product of a reputable manufacturer. H. Where more than one unit is required, of a particular classification of material, they shall all be furnished by the same manufacturer. For example, wire of one manufacturer, switches of one manufacturer. The Architect may give specific exemption from this requirement. I. All materials and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's rec- ommendations. J. For all material and equipment which UL has tested and listed, the Contractor shall provide only products that are UL labeled. 1.05 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES AND SYSTEMS A. No outages shall be permitted on existing systems except at the time and during the interval specified by the architect and /or by the electrical engineer. The architect may require written approval. Any outage must be scheduled when the interruption causes the least interference with normal schedules and business routines. No extra costs will be paid to the Contractor for such outages that must occur outside of regular weekly working hours unless specifically identified at time of bid or through change order. ` B e Contractor shall restore any circuit interrupted as a result of their work to proper operation L_ oon as possible. 1.6? PROI TION OF FINISHED SURFACES to Division 1, General Requirements - Protection of Finished Construction for additional v regments. t B. Furnish one can of touch -up paint for each different color factory finish furnished by the Contractor. Deliver touch -up paint with other "loose and detachable parts" as covered in the General Requirements. BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 260500 -2 J � I C� 7 irr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 1.07 OMISSIONS A. No later than ten (10) days before bid opening, the Contractor shall call the attention of the electrical consultant to any materials or apparatus the Contractor believes to be inadequate and to any necessary items of work omitted. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1, GENERAL CONDITIONS and /or SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS for provisions and procedures of shop drawings and submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit details of systems and equipment to Architect for review. Submit eight binders containing one copy each of Shop Drawings of following systems and equipment: (Note: Submission of Shop Drawings not in binders, but in loose sheet form, will be considered cause .- for rejection with resubmission in proper form required). C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data to Architect for approval, consisting of complete specifications, test report data, installation instructions, and other pertinent technical data required to complete product and product use information. Standard wiring diagrams shall 0 be modified where necessary to specific system. Provide adequate conduit raceways for adapting wiring diagrams to conduit system. On 1. Intent of Shop Drawings and Product Data review is to check for capacity, rating and certain construction features. Ensure that work meets requirements of Contract �" Documents regarding information that pertains to fabrication processes or means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, and for coordination of PM work of this and other Sections. No 2. Perform work in accordance with submittals marked "Approved" to extent that they agree with Contract Documents. Submittal review shall not diminish responsibility under this +� Contract for dimensional coordination, quantities, installation, wiring, supports, access, service and errors, nor for deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. Noting errors while overlooking others will not excuse proceeding in error. Requirements of Contract Documents are not limited, waived, nor superseded by Shop Drawing review. 3. Submittals of various systems shall indicate equipment supplier used and that all equipment of particular system is being furnished by same supplier. Supplier shall be qualified to supervise installation, connection and testing of system and have competent maintenance service for respective systems. ` 4. Shop Drawings and samples will be reviewed with reasonable promptness and will be �"' stamped indicating appropriate action as follows: a. "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN" means that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with Contract Documents. b. "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" means that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed providing submittal complies with Engineer's notation and Contract Documents. If, for any reason, notations cannot be complied with, resubmit as described for submittals stamped "REJECT ". C. "REVISE AND RESUBMIT" means submittal information is incomplete or ambiguous and therefore clarification or additional information is required to ascertain compliance with the contract documents, and that faOxication, manufacture or construction shall not proceed. Provide additionaLdata recWwed by the contract documents and resubmit. O �r -A �. d. "REJECT" means that submittal does not comply with Contract me* anon that fabrication, manufacture, or construction shall not procee �esubrnit irk ~' accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. r BASIC METHODS AND REQ ZEME&TS y 2605-3 �., r. Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 5. Samples: Submit any samples for substituted items as requested by Architect in accordance with Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.09 GUARANTEE/WARRANTIES A. Refer to Division 1, GENERAL CONDITIONS and/or SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS for provisions and requirements regarding guarantees /warranties for the work. B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees /warranties for work under this Division. However, such guarantees /warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities, which the manufacturer and the Contractor may have by law, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. C. Guarantee Work of this Section in writing for one year from date of Final Notice of Acceptance. Repair or replace defective materials, equipment, workmanship and installation that develops within this period, promptly and to Architect's satisfaction and correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee within Contract Price. D. Replace material or equipment that requires excessive service during guarantee period, as defined and as directed by Architect. E. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for guaranteeing connections to equipment furnished by others and wired by the Electrical Contractor under the provisions of this specification and the contract drawings. The Electrical Contractor shall be further responsible for damage to any equipment, furnished by others, caused by improper connections made by him. F. Submit guarantee to architect before final payment. 1J0 G1�1A4Y ASSURANCE r' A. �*erial and equipment shall be UL listed where standard has been established. Pert6rm tests required by specifications, Engineer's instructions, laws, ordinances or public c aties, approvals, and give timely notice. Notify Engineer of dates for inspection by other in �j 1.11 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be done in a neat, workmanlike manner, in keeping with the highest standards of the craft, and shall be performed by workmen skilled and regularly employed in that particular craft. B. Deviation from the Drawings shall not be made except upon written approval of the Architect. C. Sufficient hangers or fastenings shall be provided to add adequately and securely hang or fasten all Electrical equipment and prevent sag or unsafe conditions. Hangers or fasteners shall be as indicated on the Drawings or otherwise needed. D. Wood plugs shall not be used to fasten electrical items to masonry walls. E. Explosive or cartridge driven studs shall not be used for fastening to concrete or masonry. Expansion shields and screws anchors or toggle bolts are acceptable, provided that the required BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 260500 -4 r] C 1 J J I u N 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project I C01 holes in the concrete or masonry are made with a rotary driven masonry drill. Phillips shells are acceptable. F. All conduit, boxes, switch enclosures, and neutral conductors shall be properly grounded. G. All covers for junction boxes, outlet boxes panelboards and similar shall be in place upon completion of job. Existing boxes shall be provided with new covers where covers do not exist at the time of bid, or have been lost during construction. H. All items shall be installed squarely with respect to building framing, unless otherwise noted. I. All switches, fixtures, etc. shall be securely fastened in place. In the event that the method for fastening or mounting heights, etc. are not given on the Drawings, Contractor shall verify proper procedure with the Architect. 1.12 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized quality only. Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable subject to their timely submission, review and acceptance by the Architect. B. Reference made to the following national and industry standards are intended to indicate the latest volume or publication on the Standard. All equipment, materials and details of installation and testing shall comply with the requirements of the following applicable publications and standards: 1. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 2. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 3. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association O 4. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturing Association 5. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers -� t VN 6. ANSI: American National Standards Institute 7. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association 8. NEC: National Electrical Code 9. IBC: State of Iowa State Building Code t ` 10. IES: Illuminating Engineering Society r.n C. Reference made to codes and standards shall be interpreted as minimum requirements, here referenced codes and /or standards conflict, the more stringent shall apply. Perform work in excess of codes and standards as indicated by Drawings or Specifications. 1.13 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. The Contractor shall see that all materials, installation and workmanship is performed in accordance with the latest edition of all applicable codes, laws or ordinances of the State of Iowa and all County and local codes, laws and ordinances including Federal and State Environmental Protection Agencies, State Energy codes and Utility Regulatory Agencies. B. All work shall be further performed in accordance with the National Board of Fire Underwriters, the National Electrical Code, the Occupational Safety and Health Act and all such other specific codes as may be referred to in the individual sections of the Specifications. BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 260500 -5 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 C. Transcription of any part of a standard, code or regulation does not limit compliance to that part. Contractor shall follow the most stringent requirement of all standards, codes, regulations, Drawings and these Specifications. D. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations having jurisdiction over the installation and these specifications, the most stringent requirements shall determine the method or equipment used. E. All changes in the electrical work made after letting of the contract, in order to comply with the applicable codes or requirements of the electrical inspectors, shall be made without additional cost to The Owner. F. If the National Electrical Codes are in conflict with local codes and regulations, the most stringent codes and regulations shall be followed. 1.14 PERMITS, FEES, TAXES AND UTILITY CHARGES A. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to obtain all permits required for the electrical installation and to pay all charges required for such permits. B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay all fees and taxes imposed by State, Municipal and other bodies. C. If others do certain electrical work, such as a utility company or a municipality, all charges for such work shall be paid by the Electrical Contractor. D. All charges made by electrical inspections shall be paid by the Electrical Contractor. 1.15 ACTIVE SERVICES A. When encountered in work, active electric, steam, water, gas and sewer services shall be protected against damage due to construction work. If active services are encountered which require relocations, make request to proper authorities for determinations of procedure. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services that are to remain. If the work is to be done in a distribution panel that serves circuits outside the area of the Contract, the operation of the panel shall not be disturbed without previous authorization for each interruption. 1.16 USE OF PREMISES A. The Electrical Contractor shall confine all apparatus, storage of materials and construction to areas as directed by the Architect and he shall not encumber the premises with his materials. The Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for repairs, patching or cleaning arising from any unauthorized use of premises by him. Notwithstanding any approvals or instructions which must be obtained by the Electrical -� Contractor from the Architect in connection with use of premises, the responsibility for the safe =' working conditions at the site shall remain that of the Electrical Contractor. BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 260500-6 n f i C r L E t C 0 F 0 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 1.17 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IC01 A. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified in this Section. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections to provide complete and functional installation. B. Where Drawings or Specifications indicate discrepancies, or are unclear, advise Architect in writing before Award of Contract. Otherwise Architect's interpretation of Contract Documents shall be final. No additional compensation will be approved because of discrepancies or unclarities thus unresolved. C. Provide work specified but not shown on Drawings, and work shown on Drawings but not specified, as though expressly required by both. D. Where drawings or Specifications do not agree with manufacturer's recommendations, or with applicable codes and standards, alert Architect in writing before installation. Otherwise, make necessary changes in installation as required by Architect within Contract Price. E. Electrical Contract Drawings are diagrammatic, covering the scope of the work and general arrangement of the systems, equipment, conduits, and similar work included in the Contract. These drawings shall be followed in laying out the work included in Contract. 1. Information and components shown on details, riser diagrams and similar but not on plans, and vice versa, shall apply or shall be provided as though expressly required in all parts of the Contract drawings. 2. Because of the nature of the Contract Documents, certain basic items such as conduit fittings, elbows, pull boxes, etc., may not be shown. a. Where such items are required by other sections of the Specifications, or where they are required by the nature of the work or by codes and regulations, they shall be furnished and installed. b. Contract Documents require provision of all components and materials necessary for complete and operational electrical installation, whether or not indicated or specified. F. Do not scale Drawings. Scale indicated on Drawings is for establishing reference points, only. Actual field conditions shall govern all dimensions. _ O G. Provide items referred to in singular number in Contract Documents in quantiti6j t*,ess*nr to complete work of this Section. 1.18 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS��,' A. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to examine fully the Drawings and Specificatilin', to tales his own measurements where required and to verify dimensions. Rough -in dimensions an locations shall be verified with the Owner or supplier of equipment furnished by others prior to the time of roughing -in. 1. Electrical Contractor shall consult General, Plumbing, Sprinkler and HeatingNentilating /Air Conditioning Contract Drawings to familiarize himself with that work and to verify the spaces in which it will be installed. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements these changes shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 260500 -7 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project lC01 1.19 COOPERATION AND WORK PROGRESS A. Perform work so that progress of project, including work of other Sections is not delayed. B. The Contractor shall examine fully the Plans and Specifications of other contractors on the job to coordinate the installation of his work with that of the Other Contractors and subcontractors employed on the project. The Contractor shall remove and reinstall at his own cost, equipment that was installed without prior coordination with other trades. The Architect reserves the right to determine space priority in the event of interference between equipment to be installed by the various trades and contractors. No extras will be allowed to the Electrical Contractor for removing and reinstalling equipment in order to make space available for another contractors equipment. C. Coordinate work of this Division with work of other Divisions to complete work as soon as conditions permit and minimize interruptions of building functions. Assume additional costs incurred due to lack of or improper coordination with work of other Sections. D. Remove waste material promptly from premises. Store material and equipment in dry location, in neat and orderly fashion. Ensure adequate security for electrical material and equipment stored at job. E. Obtain detailed information from manufacturer of equipment provided under this Division as to proper methods of installation. F. Coordinate exact mounting arrangement and location of equipment shown on Drawings. Allow for proper space requirements for equipment access, operation and maintenance. Particular attention shall be given to group installations. If insufficient space or conflict with work of other Sections will prevent proper installation, access, operation or maintenance of shown equipment, immediately notify Architect and do not proceed with this part of Contract work until directed by Architect. G. Coordinate delivery of electrical equipment to project prior to installation. Such equipment stored for extended period of time prior to installation may be subject to rejection by Architect. Jb20 COWLICTS J A inflicts between the Plans and Specifications or between requirements for the various trades all be called to the attention of the Engineer. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking ds, it will be assumed that none is required and that the Contractor has submitted his bid in l.� c*1 �coftf-brmance with the Plans and Specifications as issued. 1.21ECOR RAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain one complete set of prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times during construction. As work progresses mark changes made, whether resulting from Addenda, formal change orders or other instructions issued by Architect. Mark exact locations of major conduits under floors or concealed in other inaccessible construction. Additionally various locations of panels, fixtures, apparatus and associated appurtenances as erected. Record panel circuits as connected. 1. Record drawings shall be maintained in a good, legible condition during the entire Contract. BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 260500 -8 J J I w F 7 60 0 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 B. At completion of work the Contractor shall transfer the "As built information to a clean set of contract prints and forward the Record Drawings, to the Architect showing all work as actually installed, including DIMENSIONED location of direct burial cable and underground conduit beyond limits of building. 1. All record drawings shall be signed by the Contractor and shall be indicated as "As Built Drawings ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING A. Wire Markers 1. Every ungrounded conductor shall be marked at both ends and at every point where a tap connection is made. Use permanent wire markers to indicate the panel circuit number feeding the wire. It is recommended that the panel designation also be included in the mark. 1. Wire markers shall be used so that it will be possible to identify the panel circuit serving every lighting fixture, receptacle, electrical device or equipment from the marks in the wires feeding them. Wire markers shall be included in the schedule of materials. 2.02 SHORT CIRCUIT CAPACITY A. All elements of the electrical system shall withstand, without damage or permanent deformation, the mechanical and thermal stresses produced by a short circuit at the point they are connected, without considering current limiting fuses. All switchboard, panel and distribution buses shall be braced to withstand such stresses. All interrupting devices shall be capable of opening without damage on a fault of such size. Available short circuit capacity is indicated on Drawings; if none is indicated, the available short circuit current is less than 10,000 A and equipment for this rating shall be provided. 2.03 SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING o A. FIRE AND /OR SMOKE RATED PENETRATIONS: 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M n° b. STI /SpecSeal , • - z, C. Tremco, d. Hilti'S e. Or Approved Equal 2. All firestopping systems shall be by the same manufacturer. 2. Submittals: a. Contractor shall submit product data for each firestop system. Submittals shall include product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria, test data, MSDS sheets, installation details and procedures for each method of installation applicable to this project. For non - standard conditions where no UL tested system exists, submit manufacturer's drawings for UL system with known performance for which an engineering judgment can be based upon. 3. Product: BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 260500 -9 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 a. Firestop systems shall be UL listed or tested by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Department of Commerce. 4. Use a product that has a rating not less than the rating of the wall or floor being penetrated. Reference architectural drawings for identification of fire and /or smoke rated walls and floors. 4 5. Contractor shall use firestop putty, caulk sealant, intumescent wrapstrips, intumescent <firestop collars, firestop mortar or a combination of these products to provide a UL listed : -w :system for each application required for this project. Provide mineral wool backing where 'specified in manufacturer's application detail. �._._ ,J PAFS't 3 - E E UTION 0 3.0f`CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Electrical Contractor is responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching as required for the proper installation of his work, such that its several parts come together properly and fit in to, receive, or be received by work of other contractors shown upon or implied by, drawings and specifications for the completed structure, and he shall make good after them and shall carefully fit around, close up, repair or patch and point up such as the Architect may direct. B. All holes required for the electrical work shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or in this specification. Holes shall be neatly cut with any damage to the building repaired and repainted. C. Any cost caused by defective or ill -timed work by Contractor shall be born by him. D. The Contractors shall not endanger any work by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering the work, and he shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor, in each case, except with the consent of the Architect. 1. The Contractor shall not cut existing beams, joists, footings, columns or any structural member without authorization from the Architect. 3.02 DAMAGE TO OTHER WORK A. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible and shall pay for all damages caused by his work to the building, equipment, piping ductwork and similar and all work and finishes installed under the General, HVAC, Sprinkler, and Refrigeration construction contracts and all work and finishes by such other specialty Contractors for such work as decor, shelving and fixturing, signs and similar. Repair of such damage shall be done at the expense of the Electrical Contractor to the Architects and Engineer's satisfaction. 3.03 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. No field painting or finishing is to be included under this Contract. B. Shop painting shall be as specified under the specific section or item of equipment for which shop painting and /or finishing is required. BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 260500 -10 L F Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project 3.04 MAINTENANCE OF SITE IC01 A. The site shall be kept orderly and clean of debris at all times during the construction. Storing of materials shall be in accordance with the wishes of the Owner, in areas designated for that purpose. At the conclusion of the construction the site shall be cleaned thoroughly of all rubble, debris and unused materials and shall be left in good order. All tunnels or closed off spaces shall be cleaned before closing. F B. Where the final connection of equipment in the building forces the Electrical Contractor to work in areas previously finished by the General Contractor, or in existing construction where no other Contractor is to perform work, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible that the finish of such areas is not marred, soiled or otherwise injured during the course of such work. This Contractor shall arrange with the General Contractor for the patching and refinishing of such W areas, which may be damaged in this manner. i �r 3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Test all circuits, feeders and equipment and prove free of improper grounds, opens or shorts. Electrical Contractor shall test that each receptacle installed under this Contract has an operative ground. Similar tests shall be made to insure that each panel, switch and equipment enclosure is properly grounded. B. Electrical Contractor shall perform all tests indicated on Drawings and in the individual sections of the Specifications. 3.06 FIRE STOPPING A. Where conduits, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, or floors, install a fire -stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases. Fire -stop material shall be packed tight and completely fill clearances between raceways and openings. Floor, exterior wall, and roof seals shall also be made watertight. Fire- stopping material B. shall maintain its dimension and integrity while preventing the passage of flame, smoke, and gases under conditions of installation and user when exposed to the ASTM E119 time - temperature curve for a time period equivalent to the rating of the assembly penetrated. Cotton waste shall not ignite when placed in contact with the non -fire side during the test. Fire - stopping material shall be noncombustible as defined by ASTM E136; and in addition for insulation materials, melt point shall be a minimum of 1700ijF for 1 hour protection and 1850i_iF for 2 -hour protection. r-> 6� 3.07 EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHERS n A. The electrical Contractor shall install and connect all equipment provided by other own , Plans., B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify that all materials and equipment provided by s to k installed under this Contract satisfy all electrical codes and regulations and these Sp cations;' before making any connections to them. END OF SECTION BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 260500-11 5 w l Yew Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 260519 - WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Electrical Contractor shall provide all necessary wire in conduit to each disconnect switch or other wiring device shown on the plans. Circuiting shall be as noted on the drawings. Conduit shall be as required by Section 260533 of the specifications. Wire shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code except minimum wire size shall be #12 AWG for power and #14 AWG for control. Where smaller or larger sizes are indicated on the drawings or specifications, the indicated size shall be provided. B. The number and size of conductors in any conduit shall not exceed that permitted by the National Electrical Code to provide proper heat dissipation and allow ready installation and withdrawal of conductors with out damage to the conductors, or their insulation. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Conductor sizes are based on copper. C. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required meeting Project Conditions. D. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determirtelexact routing and lengths required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS �- -�-` 2.01 WIRING AND CONDUCTORS l A. Except as otherwise noted in this Specification or on the Drawings all conductors s1fiol be faer" 600 volt rated. 1. All conductors shall be soft drawn copper. 2. Size as indicated on drawings or as required by Code, except no. 12 AWG minimum, and as indicated below. a. Where length from panel to center of load exceeds 75 ft. the minimum size shall be sized for 3% or less voltage drop. b. Where length from panel to the furthest outlet exceeds 160 ft. the minimum size shall be sized to maintain 3% or less voltage drop. C. The branch circuit voltage drop shall not exceed 3 %. d. Maximum current draw on any lighting circuit shall be 15 amperes. B. Conductor sizes #14 AWG through #6 AWG conductors shall be NEC type THHN, THWN, RHW, or better, moisture resistant, thermoplastic covered copper wire. WIRE AND CABLE 260519 -1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 C. All conductors shall be stranded copper wire, #10 AWG and smaller may be solid copper. Color code all 208 /3 -phase volt wiring using black for phase A, red for phase B, blue for phase C, white for neutral and green for equipment ground. A green ground shall be pulled in every conduit. See Grounding. D. Wiring for 50 volt and less shall be insulated in accordance with the type allowed in the National Electric Code. E. The following wiring methods and materials are not approved: 1. Flat conductor Cable Type FCC Cable 2. Mineral - Insulated, Metal Sheathed Cable Type MI Cable 3. Electrical Non - metallic- Tubing � 4.Q Armored Cable Type AC Cable 5. Non - metallic Sheathed Cable Types NM and NMC Cable 2__ Underground Feeder Cable Type OF Cable __PAI7 3 - EUTION 3.01S.kEN RADWIRING METHODS �� C-4 A. Conductor shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, and no splices shall be made except within outlet or junction boxes. B. Insulated, pressure type wire connectors shall be used for all splices. Soldered joints insulated with tape will not be permitted. 1. Connections with #8 AWG and smaller wire may be made to binding post or screw terminal. 2. Connections of wire larger than #8 AWG shall be made with copper, pressure type, bolted terminal lugs. 3. Submit conductor, connector and terminal characteristics with the schedule of materials. Include manufacturer and type. C. All wire shall be carefully pulled into the conduit so that the insulation will not be damaged. D. Care shall be taken so that such long pulls of wire or pulls around several conduit bends are not made where the wire may be permanently stretched and the insulation damaged. E. Care shall be taken at all splices and taps to see that insulation is not damaged. F. Splices and taps shall be made only in junction boxes, pull boxes, or outlet boxes. G. All conductors in vertical runs shall be supported from the conduit or raceway as required by Article 300, National Electrical Code. Provide pull boxes as required. H. All wire shall be delivered to the job in complete coils, with the manufacturer's name and approval tags indicating wire size and type of insulation fastened to same. Wire size, grade of insulation and manufacturer's name shall be marked on the finish at regular intervals. All branch circuit conductors, including neutral, shall be tagged with the circuit number at the termination points. J. Green colored conductors shall be used for equipment grounding only. WIRE AND CABLE 260519 -2 1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 K. When necessary to use a lubricant for pulling conductors, lubricant must be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, and be of such consistency that it will leave no obstruction or tackiness that will prevent pulling out old wires or pulling in new wires, or additional wires. Lubricant in steel conduit shall be Ideal "Wire Lube ", "EZ- Pull ", or an approved equal. 3.02 TESTING A. All wiring shall be tested for open and short circuits, grounds and for adequate insulation resistance between conductors and ground. Test all motors for proper rotation. END OF SECTION J CrN WIRE AND CABLE 260519 -3 F -0 1rr Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide a grounding system as indicated on Drawings and as herein specified. Ground all raceways, junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, enclosures, motor cases, machine frames, metallic structures, electrical equipment, or other conductive items in proximity to electrical circuits such that they operate continuously at a ground potential and provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. 1. Grounding shall be through the conduit system or a separate green equipment ground if so indicated on the Drawings. 2. System shall meet the requirements of all local codes as well as the latest edition of the NEC and IEEE standard 142. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code B. ANSI /IEEE 142 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial /Commercial Power Systems PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUND CONDUCTORS A. Green grounding conductors in conduit, when shown on the drawings or as required by this specification, shall be as specified for wire and cables under 600 volt Section 260519 of this division of work. B. When allowed by this specification, The NEC and Local Codes rigid galvanized conduit, IMC conduit and EMT conduit may be used as a grounding path. � r� PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING e A. Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor from each sK�l or tf 9e phase feeder and each branch circuit. Install grounding conductor in common duit v4h related phase or neutral conductors or both. Parallel feeders installed in more than re raceway shall have individual full size green insulated equipment ground conductors in each parallel conduit. B. Provide green insulated equipment ground in the same raceway with associated phase conductors, as follows: GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526 -1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 1. From 10 -32 washer -in -head machine screw in junction box or disconnect switch through flexible metallic conduit to ground terminal in connection box mounted on single phase fractional horsepower motor. 2. From equipment ground bus in Panelboards, switchboards, through conduit to motor disconnect and /or starter and through flexible metallic conduit to ground terminal in connection box mounted on three phase motors. Ground conductors to motors with separate starters and disconnects shall be bonded to each starter and disconnect device enclosure. C. Provide green ground conductor in all non - metallic conduits or ducts, unless otherwise specified. D. Provide green ground conductor in all flexible metallic conduits, unless otherwise specified. END OF SECTION Y. zt GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526 -2 me Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project SECTION 260533 - CONDUITS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE ;r 0.� 1� 1> A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all required raceways and conduits tubing to each receptacle, light fixture, motor or other wiring device shown on the plans or indicated in the specifications. The Electrical Contractor shall further provide all required, junction boxes, switch boxes, pull and large junction boxes, outlet boxes, cover plates and similar as shown on the drawings or as required. Circuiting shall be as noted on the drawings. B. Conduit shall be of the type indicated in the specifications for each respective use. Sizing shall be in conformance with the National Electric Code, latest edition, except minimum size shall be 1/2" except as otherwise noted on the drawings or specifications. The number and size of conductors in any conduit shall not exceed that permitted by the National Electrical Code to provide proper heat dissipation and allow ready installation and withdrawal of conductors with out damage to the conductors or their insulation. Maximum number of wires in any conduit shall be nine (9), except 1/2" which shall have (4) maximum unless otherwise indicated on plan. Conduit size as shown on the drawings shall not be reduced to suit conductor fill. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 CONDUITS AND TUBING No A. All conduit and fittings shall meet the requirements of ANSI Standards C80 -1 and C80 -3, and be U.L. listed, in accordance with the NEC, and as herein specified. ""t 1. Conduit, fittings, cable, and wireways application table: m Service Protective Material Coating/ Fittings Finish All indoor conduit Rigid Steel, IMC or Galvanized Threaded steel except in earth, EMT. malleable iron; or concrete or in damp watertight locations, 600V and compression type or '! below. set screw on EMT only. Motors and vibrating Flexible metal conduit Galvanized Greenfield or equipment installed (max. 24 "). malleable iron. indoors 600V and below. Metal Clad (MC) cable Metallic sheath of Galvanized Greenfield or whips for indoor light interlocking tape or Malleable iron. fixtures, short runs in smooth corrugated walls, and branch tube with green ground circuit home runs of 20 wire. amperes or less. CONDUITS, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES 260533 -I Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 B. As a minimum, conduit sizes shall be per NEC Tables 3A, 3B and 3C or as shown on plans. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 ". Minimum home run conduit size shall be 3/4 ". Electrical Contractor shall not modify the wiring arrangement without prior approval from the electrical consultant. C. No aluminum conduit shall be used. D. Rigid Steel Conduit 1. Rigid steel conduit shall be galvanized and shall be UL 1242 approved and ANSI approval rating of the best grade. 2. Rigid steel conduit shall be furnished in full 10 foot lengths, with Underwriter's Label, and standard pipe threads each end. E. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 1. IMC shall be galvanized and in accordance with U.L. 1242. and ANSI rating. 2. IMC conduit shall be furnished in full 10 foot lengths, with Underwriter's Label, and standard pipe threads each end. 3. IMC with UL listed threadless watertight fittings shall be approved for use in walk -in coolers or freezers. F. Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT) 1. EMT shall be galvanized or sherardized and shall be in accordance with U.L. 1242 and ANSI rating. G. Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Flexible metal conduit shall be galvanized steel single strip. 2. Flexible steel conduit shall be "Greenfield ", "Flexsteel" or equivalent. 3. In addition to that listed above, it may be used for the following, unless otherwise noted on drawings: a. In metal partitions b. Between outlet boxes in hung or furred ceilings, and flush type lighting fixtures and trough units. 4. Maximum allowable lengths shall be 6 feet. H. Metal Clad Cable (Type MC) 1. Metal clad cable shall have metallic sheath of interlocking tape or smooth corrugated tube. 2. Metal clad cable shall be supplied with green grounding conductor. 3. In addition to that listed above, it may be used for the following, unless otherwise noted on drawings: a. Short runs in walls. b. Between outlet boxes in hung or furred ceilings, and flush type lighting fixtures and Z_ trough units. c. Connections to equipment in shelving and to cooler/ preparation equipment in individual departments. Shall not be used for any circuit with over a 20 amp circuit t y>>y breaker. d. Home runs of multi- conductor cable will be allowed. Cabling must be properly co �J supported and comply with the 1996 NEC codes for the installation of type MC cable. Jm r� r� !�> e. Shall be approved for branch circuit wiring (under 20 amps only) in ceiling spaces and within walls. Shall not be embedded in concrete. -'f. Shall not be used where prohibited by local code. Shall not be run in locations where exposed to moisture. V CONDUITS, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES 2.60533 -2 �I� ri Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS Lo 0 A. Conduit fittings shall satisfy the requirements of ANSI Standard C80 -4. 1. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, or in any run over 200 ft., install conduit expansion joint fittings. a. Expansion joints to be telescoping sleeve type, designated for 1/4" maximum expansions, galvanized, vapor tight, with insulating bushing, lead wool packing; Crouse Hinds Type XJ, with copper grounding strap GC 100, and brass strap clamps GC 102, or equivalent. B. Rigid Conduit Fittings 1. Install Erickson coupling by Thomas and Betts Co. or approved equivalent. a. For all conduit unions in straight runs requiring union fitting. b. No running threads permitted. c. No indenter type or set screw type couplings. 2. Provide insulated bushing for all rigid steel conduit entering boxes, cabinets or where indicated on Drawings. a. Bushings are to be made of galvanized malleable iron or plastic with ring as integral part of bushing. O 3. Fittings for rigid conduit shall be threaded, unless otherwise specified. 4. Conduit Bends T' Ib d t d d d 't Ib I t a. For norma en s use s an ar con ui a ows, or equiva en . } b. For sharp bends on exposed rigid conduit use Crouse Hinds 'Cot' fittings. -' C. IMC Fittings 1. Fittings for intermediate metal conduit shall be as specified for rigid conduit. i t J� i D. EMT Fittings 1. Electric metallic tubing shall utilize water tight, compression type threadless fittings, steel or malleable iron only. Set screw may be used in concealed or exposed locations, not in damp locations, coolers or freezers. 2. Die cast or pressure cast zinc alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" shall not be used. 3. Provide insulated bushing for all rigid steel conduit entering boxes, cabinets or where indicated on Drawings. a. Bushings are to be made of galvanized malleable iron or plastic with insulating ring as integral part of bushing. E. Flexible Steel Conduit Fittings 1. Fittings for flexible steel conduit (Greenfield) shall be steel or malleable iron only and shall be multiple point type, threading into the internal wall of the conduit convolutions and shall not have an insulated throat. 2. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit fittings shall be steel or malleable iron only, shall be of a type incorporating a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression rings, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats. 2.04 PULL AND JUCTION BOXES A. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be minimum 4 inch square (100 mm) by 2 1 /8th inches (54 mm) deep for use with 1 inch (25 mm) conduit and smaller. On conduit systems using 1 1/4 inch CONDUITS, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES 2(0533 -3 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 (31.75 mm) conduit or larger, pull and junction boxes shall be sized per NEC but not less than 4 11/16 inch square (117 mm). F. Sheet Metal Boxes: code gauge galvanized steel, screw covers, flanged and spot - welded joints and corners. G. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger Than 12 Inches (300 mm) in any dimension shall have a hinged cover or a chain installed between box and cover. H. Cast Metal Boxes for Outdoor and Wet Location Installations: Type 4 and Type 6, flat - flanged, surface- mounted junction box, UL listed as rain tight. Galvanized cast iron or aluminum box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. Fiberglass or Concrete Handholes with weatherproof cover of non -skid finish shall be used for underground installations. J. Box extensions and adjacent boxes within 48" of each other are not allowed for the purpose of creating more wire capacity. K. Junction boxes 6" x 6" or larger size shall be without stamped knockouts. L. Wireways shall not be used in lieu of junction boxes. 2 PART 3 E��&ALLATION 113.01 CONDI,h � INSTALLATION -9. RVd= "eel, intermediate metal conduit, and electric metallic tubing systems shall be installed in -- acc&dance with the NEC, U.L., and local codes. c 1_4 B. Sleeves shall be provided where conduit passes through concrete. Sleeves shall be 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints and shall extend 1" beyond concrete surface. C. All conduit shall be run parallel or perpendicular to the building construction, walls, structural members or intersections of walls and ceilings, and shall be fastened in place by means of the correct size of one hole galvanized pipe clamps, where concealed only. Where exposed, two hole galvanized pipe straps, mineral ac conduit hangers, trapeze hangers, or by other means if called for on the drawings. 1. All conduit shall be securely joined together. 2. Brackets and hangers shall be unistrut or equal. Do not suspend raceways from water or other piping or ductwork. D. Conduit shall be concealed within walls and floors where possible and shall be kept more than 6" from parallel runs of flues or hot water pipes. E. Conduit in finished areas shall be concealed in floors, walls or above ceilings. Routing shall be by the most convenient means except where a specific routing is shown on the drawings. 1. Conduit installed above an accessible ceiling shall be installed as though it were exposed. F. Exposed runs shall have supports not more than 7' apart within 3' of outlet or as required by NEC or applicable local codes. CONDUITS, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES 260533 -4 t h Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 G. Conduit Support 1. Do not support conduit from the boxes. 2. Tighten conduit locknut after box and conduit have been secured in place. 3. No conduit shall be welded; use approved beam or conduit clamps as required. .., 4. Plug all unused knockouts with approved fittings. H. All fittings, fasteners, straps, etc. must be galvanized steel. No black metal cady type clips will be permitted. Straps must be bolt -on type. Snap -on type straps will not be permitted. I. Rigid nonmetallic conduit, where allowed by this Specification, shall be installed with green internal insulated ground conductor which shall be solidly connected to the building ground system. J. The conduit system shall be complete to each outlet, shall be securely locked together mechanically and electrically. K. The conduit system shall be grounded in compliance with the NEC and a green ground conductor in every conduit. L. Bends and offsets shall be avoided where possible but where necessary they shall be made with hickey or conduit bending machine, min. bend radius per NEC. M. Conduit or tubing which has been crushed or deformed in any way shall not be installed. o N. All conduit shall have the ends reamed to remove burrs before installing. '✓ O. Bushing are to be made of galvanized malleable iron or plastic with insulating dri ntegr�gl part of bushing. P. Concealed conduit shall be installed and properly supported so as not to be damaged V.61lowedo to sag during the placing of concrete, brick, the or in an exterior wall, it shall be slo " to the"z outlet boxes for drainage. O. Two locknut and one bushing shall be used wherever a rigid conduit terminates in a junction box, outlet box, switch, circuit breakers etc. R. Ends of underground conduit shall be sealed tight against entrance of water, dirt, etc., with a cable terminator, approved UL antiseize compound type CRC as manufactured by O -Z Gedney or equivalent. S. All conduits entering a building shall be sealed at the wall penetrations with a conduit entrance seat, type FSK as manufactured by O -Z Gedney or equivalent. Low temp perma SLM. T. Flexible Conduit 1. No flexible conduit run shall be longer than 6' supported at 4' intervals and within a foot of each end, for light fixture only. U. Outlet Boxes 1. Boxes to be as required for the specific service and flush mounted unless otherwise T" specified. 2. Boxes shall be set plumb, level and shall be firmly secured in position with face of box flush with finished wall or ceilings. 3. Support boxes and conduit independently of each other. 0 CONDUITS, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES 260533 -5 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 4. Conduit shall enter box squarely and shall be secured by means of locknut on outside and bushing as required inside. a. Locknuts and bushings shall be galvanized. b. Tighten conduit locknuts after conduit and box have been secured in place. C. Remove only knockouts which are required for connection of conduit. 5. Outlet boxes shall be mounted with bottom of the box as indicated on the Drawings. a. Outlet boxes in masonry walls shall be placed with bottom on nearest masonry joint or as directed. b. Where structural members or equipment interfere with the mounting height, outlets shall be set as near as possible to heights given. 6. Mount floor box with plate flush and level with finished floor. 7. ASPI reserves the right to relocate any device 15 feet prior to rough -in without any additional charge. 3.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Provide pull or junction boxes where indicated or required to facilitate pulling of wire. 1. Pull boxes shall be provided at least every 150' of run and shall be installed in an accessible location. 2. Boxes shall not be located in finished occupied rooms, unless approved by the Engineer. 3. Support boxes and conduit independently of each other. 4. Junction boxes and outlet boxes shall be securely fastened in place with provisions for hanging other items from them as required. 5. Three home run conduits through the junction or pullbox maximum. 6. All junction and pull boxes located above the suspended lay -in ceiling to be mounted (minimum) one foot above the ceiling line, in an accessible location, and supported from building structural member or bar joists. B. For concealed wiring make boxes flush with wall and make box covers accessible and easily removable without disturbing the room finish. Boxes shall have no openings except those through which conduits pass. C. Large Junction Boxes Large junction boxes shall be constructed from steel in the following gauges: Box Size Minimum Steel Gauge Up to 18 "x18 "x8" 14 :;- Covers shall be fastened with sheet metal screws or bolts or hinged unless otherwise c'J i_ >' indicated on the Drawings. 3.0=0VV t.ATES ti4! Junction boxes, pull boxes and nonstandard outlet boxes shall be provided with painted No. 12 gauge galvanized steel, beveled edge, blank cover plates fastened with countersunk flat head screws. B. over plates for flush mounted boxes shall overlap box 1/2" around perimeter. C. Make cover plates on exterior outlet and junction boxes watertight with gasket and screws. 1. Cover plates for weatherproof receptacles shall be Hubbell 5206WO cast aluminum or equivalent. 2. Weatherproof switch cover plate shall be Hubbell #7420. CONDUITS, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES 260533 -6 �J Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 D. Each wiring device shall be provided with a 302 stainless steel Pass & Seymor SN cover plate. 1. Screw heads shall match the plates. 2. Provide gang plates for grouped switches. 3. All plates shall comply with NEMA Standards WD1 -1979. E. Provide engraved plates where indicated on Drawings receptacles and Hubbell S2925 or equivalent for other devices, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 1. Engrave floor box covers where indicated on Drawings. 3.04 MOUNTING HEIGHTS - Bottom of Box A. All areas unless otherwise noted. Switches - 48" Wall Receptacles - 48" Height above counter - 6" B. In office areas. Switches - 48" Wall Receptacles - 18" Height above counter — 6" END OF SECTION CQ C)�`� CONDUITS, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES 260533 -7 h 4 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION' PART 1 - GENERAL C //1 1.01 INTRODUCTION A. This section describes the products and execution requirements relating to labeling of power, lighting, general wiring, signal, fire alarm, and telecommunications wire and cabling. Further, this section includes labeling of all terminations and related sub - systems, including but not limited to nameplates, stenciling, wire and cable marker labeling of all backbone fiber optic (inter - building, tie & riser) cables, terminating equipment and labeling of inner duct (fiber optic ). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Labels: All labels shall be permanent, and machine generated. NO HANDWRITTEN OR NON- PERMANENT LABELS ARE ALLOWED. B. Label size shall be appropriate for the conductor or cable size(s), outlet faceplate layout and patch panel design. All labels shall be self - laminating, white /transparent vinyl and be wrapped around the cable or sheath. Flag type labels are not allowed. The labels shall be of adequate size to accommodate the circumference of the cable being labeled and properly self - laminate over the full extent of the printed area of the label. C. Tape (phase identification only): Scotch #35 tape in appropriate colors for system voltage and phase. D. Adhesive type labels not permitted except for phase and wire identification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All branch circuit and power panels must be identified with the same symbol used in circuit directory in main distribution center. B. Clean all surfaces before attaching labels with the label manufacturer's recommended cleaning agent. C. Install all labels firmly as recommended by the label manufacturer. D. Labels shall be installed plumb and neatly on all equipment. E. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, or rivets. Secure nameplate to inside of recessed panelboards in finished locations. F. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 -1 Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project IC01 3.02 PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES A. Typed directories for panels must be covered with clear plastic, have a metal frame. Room number on directories shall be Owner's numbers, not Plan numbers unless Owner so specifies. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 -2 U t (I 0.4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 -2 - Pr D 4d Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Engineering Division, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240, (319)356 -5044 RESOLUTION NO. b8 -38 RESOLUTION SETTING A PUBLIC HEARING ON MARCH 11, 2008 ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE OF SAID HEARING, AND DIRECTING THE CITY ENGINEER TO PLACE SAID PLANS ON FILE FOR PUBLIC INSPECTION. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA: That a public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above - mentioned project is to be held on the 11th day of March, 2008, at 7:00 p.m. in the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. 2. That the City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice of the public hearing for the above -named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the City, not less than four (4) nor more than twenty (20) days before said hearing. 3. That the copy of the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above -named project is hereby ordered placed on file by the City Engineer in the office of the City Clerk for public inspection. Passed and approved this 4th day of ATTEST: , �be rte/ CI LERK pweng Ves /srctrboiler- setph. d oc 2/08 J City Attorney's Office c3/d&/'P'S- Resolution No. 08 -53 Page 2 It was moved by Champion and seconded by Correia the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: x x X X x X x wpdata/glossary/resolution- ic.doc NAYS: ABSENT: Bailey Champion Correia Hayek O'Donnell Wilburn Wright Publish 3/6 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project in said City at 7:00 p.m. on the 11 th day of March, 2008, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Coun- cil of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK R -1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, before 11:00 A.M. on the 22nd day of April, 2008. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at its next regular meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 29th day of April, 2008, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the following: Replacing the boiler, air cooled chiller, pumps, air handling units and upgrading the building's HVAC control system. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Gessner Group, Inc., of Iowa City, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days until a contract is awarded, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100 %) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of two (2) year(s) from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified End Date: November 14, 2008; with phase installation dates. The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Iowa City Reprographics, Iowa City, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. A $10 non - refundable and $50.00 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Gessner Group, Inc. . Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the Contractor shall furnish documentation of all reasonable, good faith efforts to recruit MBE's. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242- 4721. By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa Reciprocal Preference Act applies to the contract with respect to bidders who are not Iowa residents. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregu- larities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK pwengladbids\.sr ctr boiler.doc IN T�ro� Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356 -5044 RESOLUTION NO. 08 -69 RESOLUTION APPROVING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CON- TRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT, ESTABLISHING AMOUNT OF BID SECURITY TO ACCOMPANY EACH BID, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS, AND FIXING TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS. WHEREAS, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above -named project was published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA THAT: The plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above -named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above - named project shall be in the amount of 10% (ten percent) of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice, not less than 4 and not more than 45 days before the date for filing the bids, for the receipt of bids for the construction of the above -named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the city. 4. Sealed bids for the above -named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at the City Hall, before 11:00 a.m. on the 22nd day of April, 2008. At that time, the bids will be opened by the City Engineer or his designee, and thereupon referred to the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next regular meeting, to be held at the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, at 7:00 p.m. on the 29t day of April, 2008, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. Passed and approved this 11th day of ATTEST: CIT ERK pweng \\res\approve plans sr ctr boiler.doc 2008 C u�- -uo 4 Approved by 3- s 0 rr City Attorney's Office Resolution No. 08-69 Page 2 It was moved by Champion and seconded by O'Donnell the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: _x — x x X —x x x wpdata/glossary/resolution - ic.doc NAYS: ABSENT: Bailey Champion Correia Hayek O'Donnell Wilburn Wright Printer's Fee CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS - CITIZEN FED. ID # 42- 0330670 Di3tmliF Beeidm, being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS- CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper I time(s), on the following date(s): Legal Clerk Subscribed and sworn to before me this d� day of A.D. 20 c` uN..... 72 ow1o".. ry Public F7`�'` � Commission Number 73261 My Commission Expires owri 27 2011 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF FOR SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOwA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct public hearing on plans, speci- fications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project in said City at 7:00 p.m._on_ the f lift �y *ch, 2008, said meeting tot - [� Meld in ate Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in "d City, or 0 said meeting is can - celted, it the next meeting of the City i CoVncit #herepftet as posted, by the City dfdrk. Said plans,.spscificafions, form of con- tract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose, of making " objections to and comments concsm6g said plans, specifi- cations, contract or the cost of making said improvement. " This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by lawn MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK 55760 March 6, 2008 Printer's Fee $ '5q- Lo" - CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS - CITIZEN FED. ID # 42- 0330670 - being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS - CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper I time(s), on the following date(s): !YIGII:z -2 on Legal Clerk Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of A.D. 20 Off ry Public UNpA Mott CMITiss -W Nunn f 73251 My co rrtrrl, OFFICIAL PUBLICATION ADVER'RSEMENT FOR BIDS SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT Sealed proposals will be. received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City,. Iowa, before 11:00 A.M. on the 22nd day of April, 2008. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at its next regular meeting to be held in ft Ems` J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the � daY:of April, 2008, or at a air All work is to be done in strict.600npliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Gessner Group, Inc., of Iowa City, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be, completed orva form furnished .by the Alty and must be accompanied in a seat en"U" sep- arate from the one containing the'propos- bid The' secunty shall be made . payable to the TREASURER-OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days and posLbond satisfactory to the City ensuring the'faithfui performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, R required, pursuant to the provi -sions of this notice and the other contract docu- ments.'Bid bonds of the, lowest two or more bidders may be°retained for a period of all materials and labor, and also protect and save hanlitess the City from all claims and da(nages of any kind caused directly or In$W6`*' , by the operation of the con- tract; and sriall also guarantee the Mainte- nance of the improvement fora period of two (2) year(s):from and after its ,comple- tion and formal acceptance' by the City. The following limitations shall apply- to this Project: Specified End Date: November 14, 2008; with phase installation dates. The plans, specifications and proposed contra documents may be examined at the affice of the City Clerk. Copies of,said plans and specifications and form,of pro- posal blanks may be secured at the Office of Iowa City Reprographics, Iowa City, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. A $10 non - refundable and $50:0.0 reftind= able fee is required for each set of plans and' specifications pro0ded'to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Gessner Group, Inc. . Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ iminor- ity contractors and subcontractors on City projects. - Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract' shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontrac- tors, together with quantities; unit prices and extended dollar amounts. If no minor- ity business enterprises (MBE) are uti- lized, the Contractor shall furnish dooU- mentation of all reasonable, ,good faith efforts to recruit MBE's. A'listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242- 4721. By virtue of statutory authority, pref- erence will be given to products and pro- visions grown and coal.produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa, Statutes. The Iowa Recipro -cal Preference Act applies to the contract with respso to bidders who are not Iowa resi- d". The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and`kregu -lar- Ries. Published upon order of the Cary Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK 55777 March 17, 2008 Prepared by: Kumi Moms, Engineering Division, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319)356 -5044 RESOLUTION NO. 08 -143 RESOLUTION AWARDING CONTRACT AND AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR TO SIGN AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST A CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT. WHEREAS, RMB Co., Inc. of Iowa City, Iowa has submitted the lowest responsible bid of $759,900.00 for construction of the above -named project. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: The contract for the construction of the above -named project is hereby.awarded to RMB Co., Inc., subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign and the City Clerk to attest the contract for construction of the above -named project, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 3. The Senior Center Director is authorized to execute change orders as they may become necessary in the construction of the above -named project. Passed and approved this 13th day of May , 20 n8 C R Approved by ATTEST: ��- CI LERK City Attorney's Office It was moved by O'Donnell and seconded by Wilburn the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: x Bailey x Champion x Correia x Hayek x O'Donnell x Wilburn x Wright W:\wpdata\PWENG\SeniorCtrBoiler-Chiller-awrdcon.doc BOND No. GRIA27859A PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND RMB Co., Inc., 2,804 Industrial Park Road, Iowa City, IA 52244 as (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and Granite Re, Inc. (insert the legal title of the Surety) as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter Seven Hundred F ft N 1W$ e Thousand called the Owner, in the amount of Nine Hundred an Dollars ($ 759,900.00 ) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. N *410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of June 3, 2008 , entered into a C7 D :� it (date) 0 _< t i• written Agreement with Owner for Senior Center** Project; and City, Iowa q 0 [' * *Boiler and Chiller Rep acefient ro ect, owa M WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepaf by which Agreement is by reference made apart hereof, and the agreed -upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project ** *Gessner Group Inc. 123 North Linn Street Iowa City, IA 52245 NOW, THEKUORE, tHE CONDITIONS OF THISt OBLIGATION are such that if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain -in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in. accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even - though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of. completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient PB-1 funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of Sao (? ) years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D: No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrao- tors, all claims due them for labor perforined or materials furnished in 'the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions cf Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are apart of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS 3rd DAY OF .Tune , X008 IN THE PRESENCE OF: RMB Co., Inc. hA49 ipal) (Title) Granite Re, Inc. Jonath Pate('Pfle) Attorney -in -Fact 14001 Quailbrook Drive (Street) Oklahoma City, OK 73134 (City, State, Zip) ..,`,' Wawa (405) 752 -2600 (Phone) m =� n o PB 2 ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF PRINCIPAL (Individual) State of ) County of ) On this day of in the year before me personally come(s) to me known and known to me to be the person(s) who (is) (are) described in and executed the foregoing instrument and acknowledge(s) to me that _ he _ executed the same. Notary Public O ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF PRINCIPAL (Partnership) > : -n r State of ) -{ {-y — C r M County of ) M e( On this day of in the year before me * �sona/ come(s) a member of the co- partnership�lbf G to me known and known to me to be the person who is described in and executed the foregoing instrument and acknowledges to me that he executed the same as for the act and deed of the said co- partnership. Notary Public ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF PRINCIPAL (Corporation) State of b i) a ) County of knhns0r\--" ) Q n this I day of in the year 2008 , before me personally come(s) to me known who, 0being dully sworn, deposes and says that he is the of the , —D ` the corporation described in and which executed the foregoing instrument; that he knows the seal of the said corporation; the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by the order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that he signed his nam thereto by like order. o ry Public ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF SURETY State of Minnesota } County of Dakota ) On this 3rd day of June , in the year 204$, before me personally come(s) hnd� INC. with whom I am personally acquainted, and who, being by me duly sworn, says GRANITE RE, INC. company described in and which executed the within instrument; t company; and that seal affixed to the within instrument is such corporate seal and that it v of said company, and that he signed said instrument as Attorneys) -in -Fact of the said com WANDA LEE FRANZ t NOTARY PUBLIC - MINNESOTA Notary Public My Commission 50as Jan.31, 2010 II ter DO Pate, Attorney(s) -in -Fact of GRANITE RE. )t he is (are) the Attorneys) -in -Fact of he know(s) the corpora seal of such affixed by order of the Bokld of Directors iy by lik order. r. GRANITE RE, INC. GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY v� -n Know all Men by these Presents: That GRANITE RE, INC., a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of OKLAHOMA and h Bits principal lff#ee .at the City of OKLAHOMA CITY in the State of OKLAHOMA does hereby constitute and appoint: :G i^ M M JONATHAN PATE; WANDA. FRANZ; TOM LAHL; LISA M. FRANCOUR; JENNIFER BOYLES its true and lawful Attq-0 > - in -Fa'�c (s) fooe following purposes, to wit: •��CC To sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, and to respectively do and perfoApany and all acts and things set forth in the resolution of the Board of Directors of the said GRANITE RE, INC. a certified copy of which is hereto annexed and made a part of this Power of Attorney; and the said GRANITE RE, INC. through us, its Board of Directors, hereby ratifies and confirms all and whatsoever the said: JONATHAN PATE; WANDA FRANZ; TOM LAHL; LISA M. FRANCOUR; JENNIFER BOYLES may lawfully do in the premises by virtue of these presents. In Witness Whereof, the said GRANITE RE, INC. has caused this instrument to be sealed with its corporate seal, duly attested by the signatures of its President and Secretary/Treasurer, this 14" day of January, 2008. Kenneth D. Whittin on, President STATE OF OKLAHOMA ) SEA L ) SS: .,..- COUNTY OF OKLAHOMA ) Rodman A. Frates, Secretary/Treasurer On this 141' day of January, 2008, before me personally came Kenneth D. Whittington, President of the GRANITE RE, INC. Company and Rodman A. Frates, Secretary/Treasurer of said Company, with both of whom I am personally acquainted, who being by me severally duly sworn, said, that they, the said Kenneth D. Whittington and Rodman A. Frates were respectively the President and the Secretary/Treasurer of the GRANITE RE, INC., the corporation described in and which executed the foregoing Power of Attorney; that they each knew the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said Power of Attorney was such corporate seal, that it was so fixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that they signed their name thereto by like order as President and Secretary/Treasurer, respectively, of the Company. - My Commission Expires: May 9, 2008 Notary Pub c Commission #: 00005708 GRANITE RE, INC. Certificate THE UNDERSIGNED, being the duly elected and acting Secretary/rreasurer of Granite Re, Inc., an Oklahoma Corporation, HEREBY CERTIFIES that the following resolution is a true and correct excerpt from the July 15, 1987, minutes of the meeting of the Board of Directors of Granite Re, Inc. and that said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force and effect. "RESOLVED, that the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant Vice President shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys -in -fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the Company in the course of its business. On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the Company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has subscribed this Certificate and affixed the corporate seal of the Corporation this 3rd day of June, 2008. 'cure w 8 E A L odman A. Frates, Secretary/Treasurer GRO800 -1 i- Ic- , 4e(1) Prepared by: Kumi Morris, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356 -5044 RESOLUTION NO. 11 -306 RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE SENIOR CENTER BOILER AND CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT WHEREAS, the Engineering Division has recommended that the work for construction of the Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement Project, as included in a contract between the City of Iowa City and RMB Co., Inc. of Iowa City, Iowa, dated May 13, 2008, be accepted; and WHEREAS, the Engineer's Report and the performance and payment bond have been filed in the City Clerk's office; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the Senior Center Boiler and Chiller Replacement account # 4318 - 444300; and WHEREAS, the final contract price is $732,678. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 20th day of September _,20 11 A4_A_! Q A MAYOR Approved by ATTEST: CIT LERK It was moved by Champion and seconded by adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: x _ x x _x x x x Pweng /res /acptwork- SrCtrBoilerC h it ler. doc 9/11 NAYS: -City Attorney's Office Mims the Resolution be ABSENT: Bailey Champion Dickens Hayek Mims Wilburn Wright